Cadillac | 2000 DeVille | Owner`s manual | Cadillac 2000 DeVille Owner`s manual

2000 Cadillac Deville
Owner's Manual
Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number 25695353 A First Edition
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 1999
All Rights Reserved
i
Table of Contents
Seats and Restraint Systems
Section 1
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts
Air Bag Systems
Child Restraints
Features and Controls
Section 2
ii
Keys and Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Trunk Release
Automatic Transmission
Parking Brake
Windows
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wipers
Cruise Control
Interior and Exterior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Convenience Net
Accessory Power Outlets
OnStar® System (Option)
Sunroof (Option)
HomeLink® Transmitter (Option)
Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages
Head-Up Display
Driver Information Center
Memory and Personalization/Personal Choice Feature
Oil Life Indicator
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
Section 3
Heating and Air Conditioning
Setting the Radio Clock
Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player
Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature
Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
Your Driving and the Road
Section 4
Braking/Anti-lock Brakes
Traction Control System
Steering
Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Problems on the Road
Section 5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
Changing a Flat Tire
If You're Stuck
iii
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Service and Appearance Care
Section 6
Fuel
Checking Fluids and Lubricants
Passenger Compartment Air Filter (If Equipped)
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires and Wheels
Appearance Care
Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Maintenance Schedule
Scheduled Maintenance
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Maintenance Records
See separate Maintenance Schedule Booklet
iv
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Customer Assistance Information
Section 7
Customer Satisfaction Procedures
Customer Assistance Offices
Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)
Reporting Safety Defects on page 7-10
Service Publications
Index
Section 8
In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
Please refer to the last page of this manual for your Service Station Guide
v
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM and the GM Emblem,
CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath and the
name DEVILLE are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor
Car Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new
owner can use it.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9
vi
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
vii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
viii
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
WINDSHIELD
WASHER
PARKING
LAMPS
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
POWER
WINDOW
AIR BAG
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
FOG LAMPS
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
VENTILATING
FAN
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
FUSE
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
LIGHTER
HORN
BRAKE
COOLANT
SPEAKER
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
FUEL
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
ix
Service Station Guide
Cooling System
For
a More
Detailed Look at
What's Under the Hood
See Section 5
Tire Pressure
See Section 6
Battery
See Section 6
Spare Tire Pressure
See Section 5
See Section 6
Alternate
Fuel Door Release
Hood Release
See Section 6
See Section 6
Windshield Washer
Fluid
See Section 6
Engine Oil Dipstick
See Section 6
Oil Viscosity
Engine Oil
See Section 6
Remote Fuel
Door Release
See Section 6
Premium Fuel Recommended
Use unleaded gas only,
91 Octane or higher.
See Section 6
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-8
1-13
1-14
1-14
1-22
1-23
1-23
1-33
1-33
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag Systems
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Center Front Passenger Position
1-34
1-39
1-41
1-44
1-55
1-58
1-58
1-58
Rear Seat Passengers
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash
1-
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the power seats -- how to
adjust them, and also about the reclining front seatbacks,
memory seats, lumbar adjustments and heated seats.
Power Seats
The power seat controls, located on the sides of the front
seats, move and adjust the angle of the front seats.
D Moving the seat cushion control (A) forward or
rearward moves the entire seat.
D Moving the seat cushion control (A) up or down
adjusts the seat height.
D Lifting up or pressing down on the front part of the
seat control (A) adjusts the front angle of the
seat cushion.
D Lifting up or pressing down on the rear part of the
seat control (A) adjusts the rear angle of the
seat cushion.
D Lifting up or pressing down on the rear part of the
recline control (B) will also adjust the position of the
safety belt height adjuster.
1-2
Four-Way Power Lumbar Control
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
feature, the driver’s and
passenger’s seatback lumbar
support can be adjusted four
ways by moving the single
switch located on the side of
the seat.
To increase the lumbar support, push the switch forward.
To decrease the support, push the switch backward. To
adjust the location of the lumbar support, push the
switch upward or downward.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as it
may during long trips, so should the position of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
Massaging Lumbar (If Equipped)
Push the top of the lumbar control where it is marked
AUTO briefly to activate the massage feature.
The massage cycle will run continuously for up to
10 minutes and can be interrupted by pushing the
lumbar control down briefly. The lumbar support can be
adjusted during the massage cycle by moving the switch
forward to increase support and rearward to decrease
support. The massage cycle will continue to run even if
the ignition is turned to OFF, unless interrupted.
Four-Way Rear Power Lumbar
(If Equipped)
Four-way lumbar, without the massage feature, is also
available for the outboard rear seating positions. To
activate the rear lumbar feature, push forward on the
switch located on the rear door trim to increase support
or rearward to decrease support. The lumbar switch can
also be moved up and down to adjust the location of
the support.
If you have the optional personalization package, the
power lumbar control can be programmed for memory
recall. For more information, see “Memory and
Personalization Features” in the Index.
1-3
Adaptive Seat Control (Option)
The adaptive seat control is located on the outboard side
of each front seat. With the ignition in ON, first use the
power seat control to get the proper position.
Then press the top of the control where it is marked
AUTO. The system will inflate the cushion and take a
reading, then automatically deflate the cushion to a
suggested level of comfort, by distributing the
pressure evenly.
You may still wish to further adjust the overall firmness
or softness of the seat cushion. To get to your desired
level of comfort, hold the control up to increase the
firmness, or down for less firmness. When you let go of
the control, the seat will then automatically readjust to
your desired level of comfort.
1-4
You will also need to adjust the lumbar support. To
increase the lumbar support, push forward on the control
and to decrease support, push rearward on the control.
(The lumbar will then automatically adjust to your
body’s positioning for the duration of the trip in
two-minute cycles.)
If you exit the vehicle after the system has been
activated and the seat is left unoccupied for more than
two minutes, the system will deflate. You will then need
to readjust the lumbar support upon returning to
your vehicle.
To turn off the adaptive seat feature while still in your
vehicle, press the control down briefly. The seat will
also deflate when the ignition is turned to OFF.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel (Option)
The controls for these
features are located on the
driver’s door panel, and are
used to program and recall
previous settings.
Adjust the driver’s seat (including the lumbar
adjustments), both the outside mirrors and steering
wheel to a comfortable position and then press the SET
button. Within five seconds, press button 1.
A second mirror, seating and steering wheel position can
be programmed by repeating the above steps and
pressing button 2. Each time a memory button is
pressed, a single beep will sound. Each time button 1 or
2 is pressed, the memory positions will be recalled. Two
personalized exit positions can be set by first recalling
the driving position (1 or 2), positioning the wheel and
seat in the desired exit positions and then pressing the
SET button and, within five seconds, pressing the EXIT
button. the exit position for either previously set driver
can be recalled by pressing the EXIT button.
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter
your vehicle, automatic seat and mirror movement will
occur. The numbers on the back of the transmitters,
1 and 2, correspond directly to the numbers on the
buttons on the door panel and each seat and mirror can
be programmed to suit driver 1 or 2.
When the key is placed in the ignition in the OFF
position or when the unlock button is pressed on the
transmitter, the seats and mirrors will automatically
adjust to the programmed position.
Programming for automatic mirror and/or seat
movement is done through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). You can choose to either select or not
select automatic seat and/or mirror movement using the
transmitter or by placing your key in the ignition. For
programming information, see “Memory and
Personalization Features” in the Index.
1-5
Heated Seats (Option)
heat in approximately two minutes. To heat just the
seatback, push the BACK ONLY button once, after first
activating the heated seat feature. To turn off the heat in
the seatback, push the button again. The feature will
shut off when the ignition is turned to OFF.
Reclining Front Seatbacks
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated front and rear
seats. The control buttons are located on the armrests.
The HEAT/OFF button controls the temperature settings
HI, MED and LO. The other button is to choose BACK
ONLY heating. The LO setting warms the seatback and
cushion until the seat approximates body temperature.
The MED and HI settings heat the seatback and seat
cushion to a slightly higher temperature, and the BACK
ONLY heats only the seatback. The temperature can be
adjusted by pushing the button from HI to LO or, until
the desired setting is reached. You will be able to feel
1-6
Press the recliner control (B), located on the side of the
seat, forward or rearward to adjust the seatback.
Push the recliner control (B) up or down to adjust the
safety belt tower.
CAUTION:
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash you
could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright. Then
sit well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
1-7
Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
On some models, the head restraints tilt forward and
rear also.
Some rear seats have adjustable head restraints. Slide an
adjustable head restraint up or down so that the top of
the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This
position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
1-8
CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety Belt
Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
1-9
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
1-11
or the instrument panel ...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q:
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding
in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called
“Children.” Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
1-14
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Be sure to use the correct buckle when buckling your
lap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latch plate will
not go fully into the buckle, see if you are using the
buckle for the center passenger position.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force
to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide
under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply
force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or
if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-15
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
To move it down, press down on the power seat recline
control and move the height adjuster to the desired
position. You can move the adjuster up just by pushing
up on the power seat recline control. After you move the
adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down
without pushing the power seat recline control to make
sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
Shoulder Belt Tightness Adjustment
Your vehicle may have a shoulder belt tightness
adjustment feature. You can tell if your vehicle has this
feature by following the steps below. If you can add a
small amount of slack, your vehicle has this feature. If
the shoulder belt seems too tight, adjust it before you
begin to drive.
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor.
3. Let the belt go back all the way.
1-16
If you move around in the vehicle enough, or if you pull
out the shoulder belt, the belt will become tight again. If
this happens, you can reset it.
CAUTION:
For many people, it takes two hands to adjust the
shoulder belt for tightness because a lot of
webbing must be pulled out. If you ever tried to
do this while driving, you could lose control of the
vehicle. Adjust your shoulder belt for tightness
only when your vehicle isn’t moving.
4. Now you can add a small amount of slack. Lean
forward slightly, then sit back. If you’ve added more
than 1 inch (25 mm) of slack, pull the shoulder belt
out as you did before and start again.
1-17
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body. Don’t
allow more than 1 inch (25 mm) of slack.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-18
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-19
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-20
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-21
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-22
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
If your vehicle has side impact air bags for each of the
two rear seat outboard passenger positions, it will say
AIR BAG on each side of the rear seatback closest to
the door.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt
properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing. If
you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all the way,
you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If
this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air
bag systems.
Your vehicle has air bags -- a frontal air bag for the
driver and another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle also has a side impact air bag
for the driver and another side impact air bag for the
right front passenger. Your vehicle may also have a side
impact air bag for each of the two rear seat outboard
passenger positions.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag. But
these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
1-23
Here are the most important things to know about the air
bag systems:
CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts but don’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-24
CAUTION: (Continued)
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to work only in moderate
to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle
hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate at
all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants, frontal
air bags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful air bags have
provided in the past. Side impact air bags are
designed to inflate only in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They aren’t designed to inflate in frontal,
in rollover or in rear crashes. Everyone in
your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly -- whether or not there’s an air bag
for that person.
CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate with
great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If
you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for air bag inflation before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
frontal air bags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle. Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual
called “Children.”
1-25
How the Air Bag Systems Work
Where are the air bags?
United States
Canada
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the words AIR BAG or an air
bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-26
The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
1-27
The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
1-28
The side impact air bags for the rear seat outboard
passenger positions are in the sides of the rear seatback
closest to the doors.
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering and don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
When should an air bag inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. The frontal air bags are designed to
inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight
into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold
level is about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The
threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle
design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this
range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move
or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will
be higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers,
side impacts, or rear impacts, because inflation would
not help the occupant.
The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are not
designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only
deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For
frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle of
the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in
frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact air
bags, inflation is determined by the location and severity
of the impact.
1-29
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware
are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering
wheel, instrument panel and the side of the front
seatbacks and behind the rear seatbacks closest to
the door.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal air
bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
the air bag. Side impact air bags would not help you in
many types of collisions, including frontal or near
1-30
frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air
bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for
the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags,
and only in moderate to severe side collisions for the
side impact air bags.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, the
side of the seatback closest to the door for the side
impact air bags -- will be hot for a short time. The parts
of the bag that come into contact with you may be
warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some
smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated
air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver
from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it
stop people from leaving the vehicle.
CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air
bags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lock
the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using
the door lock and interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include air bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the frontal air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the system commands air bag inflation and driver’s
safety belt usage at deployment or in a
near-deployment crash. Some modules also record
speed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data.
D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
1-31
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag
covering on the driver’s, right front passenger’s
or rear seatback, the bag may not work properly.
You may have to replace the air bag module in
the steering wheel, both the air bag module and
the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module
and seatback for the side impact air bag. Do not
open or break the air bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
air bag systems. To purchase a service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the air bag systems. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is qualified
to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-32
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Lap Belt
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. You’ll find
them on the buckle end of the safety belts for the driver
and right front passenger. They help the safety belts
reduce a person’s forward movement in a moderate to
severe crash in which the front of the vehicle
hits something.
If your vehicle has a front bench seat, someone can sit in
the center position.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash,
you’ll need to get new ones, and probably other new
parts for your safety belt system. See “Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash” in the Index.
Center Front Passenger Position
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make
the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along
the belt.
1-33
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Passenger Positions
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-34
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All three rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here’s how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
1-35
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-36
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
The rear outboard seating positions may have a shoulder
belt tightness adjustment feature. You can tell if your
vehicle has this feature by following the steps below. If
you can add a small amount of slack, your vehicle has
this feature.
If the shoulder belt seems too tight:
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor.
3. Let belt go back all the way.
4. Now you can add a small amount of slack. Lean
forward slightly, then sit back. If you’ve added more
than 1 inch (25 mm) of slack, pull the shoulder belt
out as you did before and start again.
If you move around in the vehicle enough or if you pull
out the shoulder belt, the belt will become tight again. If
this happens, you can reset it.
1-37
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-38
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown
child restraints and for small adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away
from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the top
of the seatback.
1-39
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
1-40
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler
changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
CAUTION:
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Passenger Positions” earlier
in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt
crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out from
the guides. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the
top of the seatback.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle.
1-41
CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whether it is
the right type and size for your child. A very
young child’s hip bones are so small that a
regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough for one is always properly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
1-42
Infants need complete support, including support for the
head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in a
rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash
forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate infant restraint. This is so
important that many hospitals today won’t release a
newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant
restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a
motor vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-43
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have protection provided by
appropriate restraints.
Q:
What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not only the child’s weight and size,
but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,
make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the
center of the vehicle.
1-44
A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have the support they need in a
frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two
parts -- the base stays secured in the vehicle and
the seat part is removable.
1-45
A forward-facing child restraint (C-E) positions a
child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designed to help
protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs.
(9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches
(66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four years
of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is
designed to be used either as a rear-facing infant
seat or a forward-facing child seat.
1-46
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s
manual and the child restraint instructions are important,
so if either one of these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
A booster seat (F) is designed for children who are
about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs.
(18 to 27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about four
to eight years of age. A booster seat is designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Booster seats with shields use lap-only belts;
however, booster seats without shields use
lap-shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a
child to see out the window.
1-47
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
1-48
CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the right front
passenger air bag if it inflates. Never secure a
child restraint in the center front seat. It’s always
better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat, but before you
do, always move the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Top Strap
In order to get to a bracket, you’ll have to open the
trim cover.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it
should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to this bracket. Once you have the
top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the child
restraint itself.
Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for
the rear seating positions. You’ll find them behind the
rear seat on the filler panel.
1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the right front
passenger air bag if it inflates. Never secure a
child restraint in the center front seat. It’s always
better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat, but before you
do, always move the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child
restraint in the rear seat.
1-50
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-51
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while
you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using
a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-52
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-53
5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-54
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
1-55
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
1-56
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle. If
the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt
still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the
child’s upper body would have the restraint that
belts provide. If the child is sitting in a rear seat
outside position, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in
a crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
1-57
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-58
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.
If the frontal air bags inflate, you’ll also need to replace
the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety belt
buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new buckle
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-7
2-12
2-15
2-16
2-18
2-20
2-20
2-22
2-24
2-25
2-30
2-32
2-35
2-36
2-37
2-37
2-38
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry System
Trunk
Theft
Theft-Deterrent System
PASS-KeyR III
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Windows
2-
2-39
2-40
2-46
2-51
2-53
2-57
2-60
2-61
2-62
2-63
2-68
2-73
2-87
2-102
2-106
2-107
Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Column
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Rear Power Sunshade (If Equipped)
Cellular Telephone (Option)
Sunroof (Option)
HomeLinkR Transmitter
The Instrument Panel -- Your
Information System
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Night Vision System (Option)
Navigation (Option)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) (Option)
2-1
Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. If they
turned the ignition to ON and moved the shift
lever out of PARK (P), that would release the
parking brake. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
Both the master and VALET key have a transponder
embedded into the key for security and vehicle theft
deterrence. The keys also come with a bar code tag.
Keep the bar code tag in a safe place. If you lose your
key, you will be able to have a new one made using the
bar code tag. The replacement key must have a vehicle
theft deterrent system transponder embedded in it.
NOTICE:
Master Key
Valet Key
There is a master key that works all of the lock cylinders
(driver’s door, trunk, ignition and glove box).
There is also a VALET key which only operates the
driver’s door and the ignition.
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your keys inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have
extra keys.
2-3
Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers -- especially children -- can easily
open the doors and fall out. When a door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
2-4
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use either of the keys or the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
With the theft-deterrent system, you must unlock the
doors with the key or remote keyless entry transmitter to
avoid setting off the alarm.
Push down on the manual
lock button to lock the door
from the inside. To unlock
the door, pull up on
the button.
Central Door Unlocking System
Automatic Door Locks
Your vehicle has a central door unlocking mode and a
theft-deterrent system. When unlocking the driver’s
door, you can unlock the other doors by holding the key
in the turned position for a few seconds or by quickly
turning the door key twice in the lock cylinder.
Your vehicle is equipped with a default mode, so that
every time your doors are closed, the ignition is on and
you move the shift lever out of PARK (P), all the doors
will lock. The doors will unlock every time you stop the
vehicle and move the shift lever back into PARK (P).
If someone needs to get out while your vehicle is not in
PARK (P), have that person use the manual or power
lock. When the door is closed again, it will not lock
automatically. Use the manual or power lock to lock the
door again. If you need to lock the doors before shifting
out of PARK (P), use the manual or power lock button
to lock the doors.
Power Door Locks
Press the power door lock
button to lock or unlock all
the doors at once. The
power door lock buttons
located on the rear doors
can lock all the doors at
once, but cannot unlock
the doors.
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
With the ignition in ON, the door locks can be
programmed through prompts displayed by the Driver
Information Center (DIC). These prompts allow the
driver to choose various lock settings. For programming
information, see “Memory and Personalization
Features” in the Index.
2-5
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped
with rear door security
locks that help prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doors of your
vehicle from the inside.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on:
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Turn the passenger’s side rear door knob
counterclockwise all the way back to the
original position.
3. Turn the driver’s side rear door knob clockwise all
the way back to the original position.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
To use this lock:
Anti-Lockout Feature
1. Turn the knob on the passenger’s side rear
door clockwise all the way down to the
ENGAGED position.
Leaving your key in any ignition position with any door
open will disable the use of the power door lock buttons
as well as the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. If you close the doors, you can lock them
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. It is always
recommended that you remove the ignition key when
locking your vehicle.
2. Close the door.
3. Turn the knob on the driver’s side rear door
counterclockwise all the way down to the
engaged position.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
2-6
Also, the anti-lockout feature can be overridden by
holding the driver’s power door lock button for three
seconds or longer.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, open the door, set the
locks from the inside, get out and close the door.
Remote Keyless Entry System
With this feature, you can lock and unlock your doors
or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Your remote keyless entry transmitter operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-7
The average range of this system is about 10 feet (3 m).
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry transmitter. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
D Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
D Check to determine if battery replacement is
Operation
When you press this
symbol to unlock the
driver’s door, the parking
lamps on your vehicle will
flash twice. (You can
program your vehicle so the
parking lamps will not
flash. They will also not
flash if the manual park
lamps are on.
necessary. See the instructions that follow.
D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-8
For more information, see “Lock/Unlock Confirmation”
in the Index.) Pressing this symbol again within
five seconds will unlock the other doors. Pressing this
symbol will also disarm the theft-deterrent system and
turn on the interior lamps at night.
When you press this symbol to lock the doors, the
parking lamps will flash once and the horn will sound.
The park lamps will not flash, however, if the manual
park lamps are left on. (You can also program your
vehicle so the parking lamps will not flash and the horn
will not sound. For more information, see “Lock/Unlock
Confirmation” in the Index.) This also arms the
theft-deterrent system.
Press this symbol to open the trunk. (The VALET
lockout switch must be off for this feature to work.)
Your transmitter also comes equipped with an instant
panic alarm. To use the alarm, press this symbol. The
horn will sound and the exterior lights will flash for up
to 30 seconds. To stop the instant panic alarm, press the
symbol again or turn the ignition to ON.
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Once your dealer has
coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not
unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four
transmitters matched to it.
Since all vehicles come with only two transmitters. You
must check with your dealer for information on how to
obtain additional transmitters.
The remote keyless entry transmitter can also be used to
recall the memory settings for up to two drivers. For
more information, see “Memory Seat and Mirrors” in
the Index.
2-9
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
1. Use the round end of the door key or a coin to
pry open the transmitter.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil
(or similar object) to remove the old battery.
Do not use a metal object.
2-10
Resynchronization
Pressing the remote keyless entry transmitter buttons
numerous times (approximately 250 times) out of
the vehicle’s operating range may cause the transmitter
not to work. Replacing the battery and pressing the
transmitter buttons out of range will also cause the
transmitter not to work. If only the instant alarm button
works, the transmitter needs to be resynchronized to the
receiver. Do this by pressing and holding both the lock
and unlock buttons on the transmitter for about eight
seconds. You must be within range of the vehicle.
Once the transmitter has been resynchronized, the locks
will cycle from lock to unlock. See your dealer for
service if your transmitter doesn’t work properly.
3. Replace the battery. Insert the new battery as the
instructions under the cover indicate.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Resynchronize the transmitter. See
“Resynchronization” following.
2-11
Trunk
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through the seal between the body and the
trunk lid:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on AUTO or ECON and the temperature
between 65_ F (18_ C) and 85_ F (29_ C).
That will force outside air into your vehicle.
See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
2-12
Trunk Lock Release
To use this feature, your
vehicle must be in PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N) and the
VALET lockout switch must
be off.
Press the trunk release button, located on the left side of
the instrument panel, to open the trunk.
You can also press the trunk button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter to access the trunk
compartment. To disable the use of this feature, see
“Valet Lockout Switch” in the Index.
Trunk Lid Tie Down
CAUTION:
Driving with the trunk lid open can allow
dangerous CO (carbon monoxide) gas to come
into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you ever need to drive with your trunk lid
open, then:
D Make sure all windows, the rear seat
pass-through and sunroof are closed.
D Turn the fan on your heating and cooling
system to its highest speed, with the setting
on VENT. This forces fresh outside air into
your vehicle.
D Open all air ducts on the instrument panel.
Don’t use the trunk lid tie down if you are towing
a trailer because of the danger of CO.
2-13
This feature is used to secure the trunk lid if it will not
close completely, such as when carrying large packages
in the trunk.
1. Attach the clip end of the tie down to the “D” ring on
the trunk lid (see view A).
2. Attach the hook end of the tie down to the striker
located at the center of the trunk sill (see view B).
3. Tighten the tie down by pulling the free end of the
cord until secure.
4. To remove the tie down, press the clip end release
and loosen the cord.
2-14
Theft
Parking Lots
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key?
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your
ignition and transaxle. And remember to lock the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
D If possible, park in a busy, well lit area.
D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
trunk or glove box. Be sure to close and lock the
storage area.
D
D
D
D
D
Close all windows.
Move the trunk release lockout switch to ON.
Lock the glove box.
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
Then take the door key and remote keyless entry
transmitter with you.
D Leave only the valet key.
D Take all other keys and the Remote Keyless Entry
transmitter with you.
2-15
Theft-Deterrent System
If the ignition is off and
any door is open, the
SECURITY light will flash,
reminding you to activate
the system.
The light will also flash if the battery has been
disconnected and reconnected. To arm the system, do
the following:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door using the power door lock or the
remote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITY
light should come on and stay on.
3. Close all the doors. The SECURITY light should go
off within about 30 seconds.
The horn will sound and the lamps will flash for about
30 seconds when the door or trunk is opened without the
key or the remote keyless entry transmitter. The horn
also sounds if the locks are damaged.
2-16
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
button or the remote keyless entry transmitter.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident:
D Always unlock a door with a known key or use the
remote keyless entry transmitter. (Using a known
key or pressing the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter disables the theft-deterrent
system.) Unlocking a door any other way, such
as using an unknown key, will activate the
alarm system.
D The vehicle should be locked with the door key after
the doors are closed if you don’t want to activate the
theft-deterrent system.
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with your key. You can also turn off the alarm by using
the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter or by using a known key. The alarm won’t
stop if you try to unlock a door any other way
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
Valet Lockout Switch
The valet lockout switch is
located inside the glovebox.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open, lock
the vehicle using the power door lock or the remote
keyless entry transmitter and close the door.
Wait 30 seconds until the SECURITY light goes off.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual lock
and open the door. The horn will sound and the
headlamps will flash.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to see
if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To
replace the fuse, see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the
Index. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, you may
need to have your vehicle serviced.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always activate the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
Pushing the VALET lockout switch to ON will disable
the use of the power trunk, fuel door and garage door
openers. Pushing the switch to OFF again will make
these features reusable. Locking the glove box with the
key will also help to secure your vehicle.
The remote keyless entry transmitter cannot be used to
open the trunk or fuel door if the valet lockout switch is
in the ON position. Also, the valet key will not unlock
the glovebox or trunk.
2-17
PASS-KeyR III
Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS-Key III
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key III is a passive
theft-deterrent system. This means you don’t have to do
anything different to arm or disarm the system. It works
when you insert or remove the key from the ignition.
Your PASS-Key III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
2-18
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key III uses a radio frequency transponder in the
key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
When the PASS-Key III system senses that someone is
using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter
and fuel systems. The starter will not work and fuel will
stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the SECURITY light comes on, the key may
have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and
try again.
If the engine does not start, and the key appears to be
undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index). If the engine still does not start
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key III
to have a new key made.
It is possible for the PASS-Key III decoder to learn the
transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to
ten additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
This procedure is for learning additional keys only. If all
the currently programmed keys are lost or do not
operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith who
can service PASS-Key III to have keys made and
programmed to the system.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key III to get a new blank key that is cut exactly
as a current black-colored driver’s key that operates the
system. Do not use a gray-colored valet key for
this procedure.
To program the new key:
D Insert the current driver’s key (black in color) in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start see your dealer for service.
D After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF, and
D Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON
within ten seconds of removing the previous key.
D The SECURITY light will turn off once the key has
been programmed. It may not be apparent that the
SECURITY light went on due to how quickly the
key is programmed.
D Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes
on and stays on, you will be able to start your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key III system, however, is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key
III system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key III key, see your
dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key III to
have a new key made.
remove the key.
2-19
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
2-20
Ignition Positions
If you cannot start your vehicle and you are unable to
remove your key from the ignition, see “Shift Lock
Release” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be injured or even killed. They could
operate power windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in
the vehicle with children.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in OFF and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the key or the
ignition switch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
With the ignition switch, you can turn the switch to four
different positions.
OFF (A): Before you put the key in, the ignition will be
in OFF. This is the only position in which you can
remove the key. This position locks the ignition, steering
wheel and transaxle. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
ACCESSORY (B): This position allows you to use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off. This position will allow you to turn off the
engine, but still turn the steering wheel. If your vehicle
has a column shifter, you will still be able to move the
shift lever. Use ACCESSORY if you must have your
vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example, if
your vehicle is being pushed or towed).
ON (C): This position is for driving. If your vehicle has a
floor (console) shifter and you turn off the engine, the
transaxle will lock. If you need to shift the transaxle out of
PARK (P), the ignition key has to be in ON.
START (D): This position starts the engine.
2-21
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Starting Your Engine
The following accessories on your vehicle may be used
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned from
ON to OFF:
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
D Radio
D Power Windows
D Sunroof
Power to these accessories will stop after 10 minutes or
if any door is opened. If you want power for another
10 minutes, turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY, then
back to OFF. Always leave your key in OFF when using
RAP. If you leave your key in any other position than
OFF, your battery will discharge prematurely.
2-22
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Starting Your Northstar V8 Engine
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try to help avoid draining your
battery or damaging your starter.
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual that tells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START for about three seconds at a time until your
engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each
try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging
your starter.
2-23
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
In very cold weather, 0_F (-18_C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The electrical cord is located on the driver’s side of
the engine, behind the transaxle dipstick/fluid fill
location (C) and next to the engine.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
A. Engine Oil Dipstick Location
B. Engine Coolant Heater Cord
C. Transaxle Dipstick/Fluid Fill Location
2-24
CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
The automatic transaxle may have either a shift lever
located on the steering column or on the console
between the seats.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for
that particular area.
Console Shifter
2-25
CAUTION:
Column Shifter (Digital and Analog Cluster similar)
PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start the engine because
your vehicle can’t move easily.
2-26
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If
you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as
you maintain brake application. Then move the shift
lever into the gear you wish. See “Shifting Out of
PARK (P)” in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
has stopped.
Also use this gear to rock your vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transaxle. See “Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in
the Index for additional information.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
CAUTION:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
2-27
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out
of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine
racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly, or
if it doesn’t seem to shift gears as you accelerate,
something may be wrong with a transaxle system
sensor. If you drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged. So if this happens, have
your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you
can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less
than 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for
higher speeds.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you’re:
D Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transaxle will shift down to the next gear and
have more power.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D).
Here are examples for using THIRD (3) instead of
DRIVE (D).
D When driving on hilly, winding roads.
D When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
D When going down a steep hill.
2-28
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power. You
can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your
speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then
you would also want to use your brakes off and on.
NOTICE:
Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going
slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage your engine.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills,
or in deep snow or mud. (If the shift lever is put in
FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t shift into gear until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.)
NOTICE:
If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could cause overheating and damage
the transaxle. Use your brakes to hold your
vehicle in position on a hill.
Performance Shifting (DTS Only)
When your vehicle detects a change in driving
conditions, it will automatically initiate the appropriate
performance shift mode. When this occurs the gear
display on the instrument panel cluster will change to
indicate that the transmission has shifted to a different
gear. For example, the gear display on the cluster may
indicate D, 3, 2, or 1 even though the gearshift is still in
DRIVE (D). Once the performance shift mode ends, the
gear display on the cluster will return to normal.
2-29
Parking Brake
Hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right
foot and push the parking
brake pedal down with
your left foot to set the
parking brake.
If the brake doesn’t fully release, you can manually
release the lever. Before attempting to release the
lever however, be sure to carefully read the
following paragraphs.
CAUTION:
Always shift to PARK (P) before pulling the
manual release lever. If your hand or arm is in
the way of the pedal you could be hurt. The pedal
springs back quickly. Keep your hand and arm
away when you use the manual release lever.
If the ignition is on, the BRAKE indicator light
should come on. If it doesn’t, you need to have your
vehicle serviced.
When you move out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
and the engine is running, the parking brake should
release. If the parking brake has not been fully released
and you try to drive off with the parking brake on, the
BRAKE indicator light will come on and stay on.
2-30
Before releasing the manual parking brake, be sure to
put the vehicle in PARK (P) and turn the ignition
to OFF.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index. This section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving. For
more information, see “Brake Indicator Light” in
the Index.
Reach under the driver’s side of the instrument panel
and pull on the manual release lever, which is located
above the parking brake pedal. If the parking brake does
not release, you should either drive to the nearest service
station or have your vehicle towed.
2-31
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Steering Column Shift Lever (If Equipped)
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
D Pull the lever toward you.
2-32
Console Shift Lever (If Equipped)
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
D Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake.
4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P).
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake.
4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-33
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the
engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-34
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in
the Index.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Shift Lock Release (Console Shifter Only)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is in ON. See “Automatic Transaxle” in
the Index.
This vehicle is equipped with an electric shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you want. If you ever
hold the brake pedal down, but still can’t shift out of
PARK (P) and your vehicle has a column shifter,
try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY.
D Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is
in PARK (P), and
D Prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK (P)
unless the ignition is in a position other than OFF.
The shift lock release is always functional except in
the case of a dead battery or low voltage (less
than 9 V) battery.
If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low
voltage, there is an override access hole that will allow
you to override the shift lock release.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-35
The console shift lock
release is located on the
front of the center console.
Parking Over Things That Burn
To access the shift lock release hole:
1. Verify that the shift lever is in PARK (P).
2. Locate the shift lock release on the front of the
center console.
3. Remove the shift lock release hole cover.
4. Insert a small diameter screwdriver into the shift
lock release hole, press in and hold.
5. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.
7. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.
8. Put the shift lock release hole cover back on.
2-36
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)
2-37
CAUTION:
Windows
Power Windows
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake after
you move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
The power window controls are located on the armrest
near each window. Press the up or down arrows on the
controls to raise or lower windows.
The second rearward position on the window control
operates the express-down window feature.
2-38
Express-Down Window
Horn
All power windows have this feature. Pressing the control
rearward to the second position then releasing it, will
lower a window completely. If you want to stop the
window as it is lowering, press the control forward briefly.
Press the control forward again to raise the window.
The horn can be sounded by pressing on the center of
the steering wheel pad.
The first rearward position on the power window
control operates the driver’s power window in the
non-express mode.
Rear Window Lockout
Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Column
Tilt steering allows you to
adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. Raising
the steering wheel to the
highest level gives your legs
more room when you enter
and exit the vehicle.
This knob is located on the outboard side of the steering
column. Push up or down on the knob to adjust the tilt
of steering wheel. Then, push back or pull forward on
the knob, to adjust the height of the steering column.
Release the knob to lock the wheel and column
into place.
Pressing this button down will disable the rear window
controls and cause the button to light, indicating that the
feature is in use. To restore power to the rear windows,
press the button again.
It is also possible to move the steering column to a
different position by momentarily pressing the
adjustment knob.
2-39
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Headlamp High/Low Beam
Turn and Lane Change Signals
Push forward for high beam to change the headlamps
from low beam to high. Pull the lever back and then
release it to change from high beam to low.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
The lever returns automatically when the turn is complete.
This light located on the
instrument panel will be on,
indicating high-beam usage.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change
is complete. The lever returns when it’s released.
If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime will sound
and the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
TURN SIGNAL ON (after driving about a mile) to
remind you to turn it off.
Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned out signal bulb.
Other drivers won’t see the turn signal.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs if the
arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.
2-40
Flash-To-Pass
This lets you use the high beam headlamps to signal the
driver in front of you that you want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to use.
When you do:
D If the headlamps are either off or in the DRL mode,
the high beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay
on as long as you hold the lever there. Release the
lever to turn them off.
D If the headlamps are on highbeam, they will switch
to low beam. To return to high beam, push the lever
away from you.
Windshield Wipers
LO or HI: Turn the band away from you to either
LO (low speed) or to HI (high speed), depending on the
wiper speed you want.
DELAY: You can set the wiper speed for a long or short
delay between wipes with this setting. Turn the band to
one of the DELAY positions. The closer you move it to
LO, the shorter the delay.
OFF: Turn the band to OFF to turn off the wipers.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
WIPER: Turn the band on the turn signal lever to
control the wipers.
MIST: Turn the band toward you to“mist” and then
release it for a single wiping cycle. For more cycles,
hold the band on MIST longer.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
2-41
Rainsense
t Wipers (If Equipped)
This moisture sensor is mounted on the passenger’s
interior side of the windshield behind the rearview
mirror and is used to automatically operate the wipers
by monitoring the amount of moisture that is on
the windshield.
The Rainsense system can be activated by turning the
wiper stalk to one of the five sensitivity levels indicated
on the stalk. The position closest to OFF is the lowest
sensitivity setting. This allows more water to collect on
the windshield between wipes. Turning the stalk away
from you to the other settings increases the sensitivity of
the system and frequency of wipes. A single wipe will
occur each time you turn the wiper stalk to a higher
sensitivity level. An initial wipe occurs when you turn
the ignition on as a reminder that Rainsense is active.
2-42
The Rainsense wipers operate in a delay mode as well as
a continuous low or high speed depending on the
amount of moisture and the sensitivity level. The MIST
and “wash” cycles operate as normal and are not
affected by the Rainsense function.
NOTICE:
The wipers must be turned off when going
through a car wash to avoid damage.
It is important to note that the Rainsense wiping feature
can be overridden at any time by manually changing the
wiper control to LO or HI speed.
If you ever need to replace the windshield, make sure it
is Rainsense compatible.
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
At the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever there is
a paddle with the word PUSH on it. To spray washer
fluid on the windshield, press and release this paddle.
The wipers will clear the windshield and either stop or
return to your preset speed. For more washer cycles,
press and hold the paddle.
LOW WASHER FLUID will be displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when the washer fluid reaches
a low level.
The controls to operate cruise control are located on the
steering wheel.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This is helpful on
long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
2-43
Setting Cruise Control
CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where you
D
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. (See
“Traction Control System” in the Index.) When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
the cruise control back on.
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
1. Press the CRUISE ON/OFF button to turn cruise
control on. (The button is located on the bottom left
of the steering wheel.) An indicator light will come
on to show that the cruise control is on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET/CST (coast) button. (The button is
located on the bottom right of the steering wheel.)
The CRUISE ENGAGED message will display on
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
2-44
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once the vehicle is traveling approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, you can press RES/ACC
(resume/accelerate) button to return to your desired
preset speed. Also note that the DIC will display the
CRUISE ENGAGED message again.
The vehicle will return to and stay at your preset speed.
If you press and hold the RES/ACC button briefly, the
vehicle speed will increase until you release the button
or apply the brake. Again, unless you want to go faster,
do not press and hold the RES/ACC button.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the SET/CST button, then release the button
and the accelerator pedal. You will now cruise at the
higher speed.
D Press the RES/ACC button. Hold it there until you
get up to the speed that you want, and then release
the button. To increase your speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the RES/ACC button and then
release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will
speed up approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you have
set the cruise control speed by pressing the
SET/CST button.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
D Press the SET/CST button until you reach the lower
speed you want, then release it. A CRUISE
ENGAGED message will then be displayed in
the DIC.
D To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET/CST button briefly. Each time you do this,
the vehicle will slow down approximately 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
2-45
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Exterior Lamps
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
This control on the left
side of the instrument
panel controls these
lamp systems:
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Applying the brake or shifting
into a lower gear will take you out of cruise control. If
you need to apply the brake or shift to a lower gear due
to the grade of the downhill slope, you may not want to
attempt to use your cruise control feature.
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, step lightly on the brake
pedal, or press the CRUISE ON/OFF button on the
steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
2-46
D
D
D
D
D
Headlamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
License Plate Lamp
Parking Lamps
Turn the lamp control knob clockwise to the first stop,
to turn on the parking, taillamps, sidemarker lamps. If it
is night, the instrument panel switch backlighting will
also illuminate. Turn the control knob counterclockwise
all the way back to turn the lamps and lights off.
Headlamps
Turn the control knob clockwise all the way to turn on
the parklamps and headlamps. Turn the control knob
counterclockwise to turn the lamps off.
Wiper-Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for
approximately six seconds.
In order to operate the wiper-activated headlamps, the
Twilight SentinelR must be turned on; the ignition key
in the ON position and the windshield wipers on, or in a
delay setting. If the windshield wipers are active while
the ignition key is in ON, but the Twilight Sentinel
switch is off, a “Headlamps Suggested” message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center. This
message informs the driver that turning on the exterior
lamps is recommended.
This feature lights the way in poor weather and it also
makes your vehicle more visible to other drivers. If the
wiper-activated headlamps are on and the ignition
switch, Twilight Sentinel, or the wipers are turned off,
the wiper-activated headlamps will immediately
turn off.
Lamps on Reminder
If the manual headlamp control is left on and a door is
opened, a warning chime will sound. An exception is
when the Twilight Sentinel function is active.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
2-47
The DRL system will make the high-beam headlamps
come on at reduced intensity when:
D it is still daylight and the ignition is on,
D the headlamp switch is off and
D the transaxle is not in PARK (P).
When DRL are on, only your high-beam headlamps
(at reduced intensity) will be on. No other exterior
lamps such as the parking lamps, taillamps, etc. will be
on when the DRL are being used. Your instrument panel
won’t be lit up either.
When the Twilight Sentinel control is on and it’s dark
enough outside, the high-beam headlamps (at reduced
intensity) will turn off and automatic high-beam
headlamp operation will occur. When the Twilight
Sentinel switch is on and it’s bright enough outside, the
automatic lamps will go off, and the high-beam
headlamps at reduced intensity will take over.
If it’s dark enough outside and the Twilight Sentinel
control is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message
will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
This message informs the driver that turning on the
exterior lamps is recommended even though the DRL
are still illuminated (it’s become dark enough outside to
require the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps).
Turning on the Twilight Sentinel, the headlamp switch
or the fog lamp switch will remove the HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message.
To idle your vehicle at night with the DRL off, turn
off the Twilight Sentinel and shift the transaxle into
PARK (P). Placing your vehicle in PARK (P) disables
the DRL. The DRL will stay off until you shift out
of PARK (P).
To drive your vehicle at night with the DRL off, turn
off the Twilight Sentinel and manually turn on the
parking lamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
2-48
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Use the fog lamps for better
vision in foggy or misty
conditions. When you press
the fog lamp button, a fog
lamp symbol located in the
instrument panel will come
on to indicate that the fog
lamps and the parking
lamps are on.
Cornering Lamps
The cornering lamps come on when the headlamps
or parking lamps are on and you signal a turn with
the multifunction lever. They provide more light
for cornering.
Twilight SentinelR
This control is next to
the headlamp knob. It
automatically switches the
lamps on and off by sensing
how dark it is outside.
Press the button again to turn them off.
If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps
will turn off. They’ll turn back on again when you
switch to low-beam headlamps.
When the Twilight Sentinel is on and the fog lamp
switch is activated, the fog lamps will remain on as well
as the headlamps and parking lamps.
To operate the Twilight Sentinel, leave the lamp knob
off and move the TWILIGHT control to any position
but OFF.
2-49
If you move the control all the way to the right, the
lamps will remain on for approximately three minutes
after the ignition has been turned to OFF. If you move
the control so it is just on, the lamps will go off quickly
when you turn the ignition switch out of OFF. You can
adjust the delay time from only a few seconds to about
three minutes.
Light Sensor
If it’s dark enough outside and the Twilight Sentinel
control is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message
will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
This message informs the driver that turning on the
exterior lamps is recommended (it’s become dark
enough outside to require the headlamps and/or other
exterior lamps). Turning on the Twilight Sentinel, the
headlamp switch or the fog lamp switch will remove the
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message.
The light sensor for the DRL and the Twilight Sentinel
is located in the center of the front defogger grille. If
you cover the sensor, it will read “dark” and the lamps
will come on.
2-50
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
Courtesy Lamps
If the headlamp or manual parking lamp control
has been left on, the exterior lamps will turn off
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to
OFF. This protects draining the battery in case you have
accidentally left the headlamps or parking lamps on. If
you need to purposely leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes with the ignition in OFF or ACCESSORY,
turn the manual control knob off and then back on.
To delay the lamps from turning off, see “Twilight
Sentinel” in the Index.
The courtesy lamps are located on the ceiling above the
rear seat. These lamps come on with the control lamp
knob or when any door is opened and it is dark outside.
Puddle lamps are located on the bottom of the front and
rear door trim.
If the headlamp switch is turned on after the ignition key
is moved to either OFF or ACCESSORY, the lamps will
not time out.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel
Intensity/Brightness Control
The displays automatically dim when it becomes dark
outside and your lights are on. The displays
automatically brighten when it becomes light outside.
Backlighting will only remain active as long as the
parking lamps are on and it is dark outside.
Illuminated Entry
The illuminated entry system turns on the courtesy
lamps and the backlighting to the door switches and to
the lamp control knob when a door is opened or if you
press a remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button.
If activated due to the transmitter, the lighting will
remain active for about 40 seconds. Since the
illuminated entry system uses the light sensor, it must be
dark outside in order for the courtesy lamps to turn on.
The courtesy lamps turn off approximately 25 seconds
after the last door is closed. They will dim to off if the
ignition key is placed in ON, or immediately deactivate
if the power locks are activated.
2-51
Parade Dimming
Map Lamps
This feature prohibits dimming of the digital displays
and backlighting during daylight hours when the key is
in the ignition and the headlamps are on. This feature
operates with the light sensor for the Twilight Sentinel
and is fully automatic. When the light sensor reads
darkness outside and the park lamps are active, the
digital displays can be adjusted by turning the lamp
control knob counterclockwise to dim and clockwise to
brighten lighting.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console
on the ceiling and in the rear door opening. These lamps
come on automatically when any door is opened and it is
dark outside. For manual operation, press the button to
turn them on. Press it again to turn them off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
2-52
These lamps are located in the front overhead console.
Press the button to turn them on. Press it again to turn
them off.
Battery Load Management
Mirrors
The battery load management feature is designed to
monitor the vehicle electrical load and determine when
the battery is in a heavy discharge condition. During
times of high electrical loading, the engine may idle at a
higher RPM setting than normal to make sure the battery
charges. High electrical loads may occur when several
of the following are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, high blower fan, heated
seats and engine cooling fans.
Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror
with Compass (If Equipped)
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp, glove
box lamp, cigarette lighters or the garage door opener.
When the ignition is turned off, the power to these features
will automatically turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes
if a new car has 15 miles (24 km) or less). Power will be
restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door is
opened, the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp switch
is turned on.
Your vehicle may have an electrochromic inside
rearview mirror with a compass.
By pressing the MIRROR side of the button located at
the bottom of the mirror, the mirror automatically
darkens to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you.
The mirror also includes an eight-point compass display
in the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle
is driven.
2-53
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Cleaning Photocells
Time Delay
The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which
prevents unnecessary changing from night back to the
day position. This delay prevents rapid changing of the
mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the
photocells when necessary.
Compass Operation
Mirror Operation
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the compass heading.
Press COMPASS once to turn the compass on or off.
Compass Calibration
The right side of the button, located at the bottom of the
mirror, turns the electrochromic mirror on and off. To
turn on the automatic dimming feature, press MIRROR.
To turn off automatic dimming, press MIRROR again.
The green indicator light will be illuminated when this
feature is active.
2-54
If after two seconds the display does not show a
compass heading (“N” for North, for example), there
may be a strong magnetic field with the compass. Such
interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic
item. If the letter “C” should ever appear in the compass
window, the mirror needs calibration.
The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways:
D Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less
until the display reads a direction, or
D Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
To adjust compass variance.
1. Use the COMPASS button located at the bottom of
the mirror. Press and hold COMPASS until a zone
number appears in the display.
2. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
3. Press the COMPASS button on the bottom of the
mirror until the new zone number appears in the
display. After you stop pressing the button, the
display will show a “C” and will need recalibration
2-55
Power Remote Control Mirror (Heated)
The control on the driver’s
door armrest operates both
outside rearview mirrors.
Press (R) on the control
switch to choose the right
mirror or (L) to choose the
left mirror. The center
switch position is for off
and will not move the
mirrors if touched.
Driver’s Outside Auto-Dimming
Rearview Mirror
Only the driver’s side outside mirror will adjust for the
glare of headlamps behind you. This feature is
controlled by the on and off settings on the
electrochromic mirror. See “Electrochromic Day/Night
Rearview Mirror with Compass” in the Index.
Curb View Assist Mirror (If Equipped)
To adjust the mirror, push the control pad in the
direction you want the mirror to go. Adjust each mirror
so you can see the side of your vehicle and the area
behind your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors, it will
also be capable of performing the curb view assist
mirror feature. This feature will cause the passenger’s
mirror to tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle
is in REVERSE (R). This feature may be useful in
allowing you to view the curb when you are
parallel parking.
When you operate the rear window defogger, it also
warms both outside mirrors to help clear them of fog
or ice.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a
five-second delay has occurred, the passenger’s mirror
will return to its original position.
The mirrors can also be programmed for personalization
if you have the optional memory package. For more
information, see “Memory Seat and Mirrors” in
the Index.
If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted,
the mirror switch may be used.
2-56
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the Driver
Information Center.
Convex Outside Mirror
Front Storage Area (If Equipped)
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
The front storage area comes with a coinholder, a
storage compartment for CDs or tapes, an optional
cellular telephone and a dual cupholder.
Map Pocket
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Storage Compartments
The map/storage pockets are located on each front
and rear door trim as well as on the back of both
front seatbacks.
Center Instrument Panel Compartment
For vehicles without the center storage console, the
storage compartment is located in the center of the
instrument panel below the radio. Pull the door out to
reveal the accessory power outlet and storage
compartment. To clean the storage compartment, lift
out while pulling on the sides.
Glove Box
Center Console Storage (If Equipped)
The glove box is located in front of the passenger’s seat.
To lock the glove box door, insert the oval key into the
lock cylinder and turn it clockwise. Turn the key
counterclockwise to unlock the door.
The center console includes a storage tray, storage
compartment for CDs or tapes, a dual cupholder that
unfolds, a coinholder, an optional cellular telephone and
an armrest. The cupholder can be opened by pressing on
the surface panel located in front of the armrest and
unfolding it.
2-57
Full Floor Console Storage (If Equipped)
Center Flex Storage Unit (If Equipped)
The full floor console has an upper and lower storage
area. The lower has two removable that can hold tapes
and/or CDs. There is also a removable coinholder that
attaches to the side of one of the bins. The upper storage
area is available for the optional cellular telephone. A
dual cupholder is located in front of the console. Open
and close by pressing on the cupholder. To open the
console, pull up on either lever to open the upper or
lower storage area.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a center flex storage
unit that includes a front center seat with a lap belt and
an underseat storage compartment. The center seatback
can be used as a fold down armrest with extra space for
CDs or tapes. An optional cellular telephone is located
in the underseat storage compartment. Cupholders are
also located at the front edge of the storage unit.
Rear Storage Center Armrest
The convenience net is located inside the back wall of
the trunk. Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the
net. It can help keep them from falling over during sharp
turns or quick starts and stops.
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear seat armrest which
includes an open storage compartment and a dual
cupholder. To open, release the latch at the front edge.
Rear Storage Door Trim Armrest
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear storage door
trim armrest. The storage area is located in the rear door
trim under the switch plate lid and includes an accessory
power outlet.
2-58
Convenience Net
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in the
trunk as far forward as you can. When not using the net,
hook the net to the tabs securing it to the sill plate.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers or other flammable items
into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them, causing a
damaging fire.
Front Ashtray
With the full center console, the ashtray is located below
the climate control system. To open, push down on
the cover. To clean the ashtray, lift it out by gripping
the sides.
For vehicles without the center console, pull the tray out
to reveal the ashtray. The tray is located beneath the
radio. To clean this ashtray, lift out by pulling on
the snuffer.
Cigarette Lighter (Option)
The cigarette lighter is located near the ashtray. Press it
all the way in and release. It will pop back by itself
when it’s ready to light. You may also have a lighter
located at the rear seat air outlet.
If you have cigarette lighters in your vehicle, they can
be used to provide electrical power to accessories. See
“Accessory Power Outlets”in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
Rear Ashtray (Option)
To use the side rear ashtray located on the armrest, lift
the lid.
2-59
Sun Visors
Rear Power Sunshade (If Equipped)
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can
also be detached from the center mount and moved to
the side while the auxiliary sunshade remains to block
the glare from the front. The visors also have
side-to-side slide capability.
The rear power sunshade helps to reduce the amount of
heat and light entering the rear window.
The driver’s sunshade is also equipped with a
storage flap.
To close the power sunshade, press and release the
REAR SHADE switch again. The rear power sunshade
switch only works when the ignition is on or when the
Retained Accessory Power is active. See “Retained
Accessory Power” in the Index.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sunshade down and lift the cover. Move the
slide switch up or down to brighten or dim the lamp.
Lighted Rear Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
Pull the vanity cover down to see the mirror. Move the
slide switch up or down to brighten or dim the lamp.
Coat Hooks
Your vehicle is equipped with flip-out coat hooks. They
are located above the rear doors, behind the rear assist
handles. Return to the stowed position when not in use.
2-60
The rear power sunshade is located in the rear shelf. To
raise the power sunshade, press and release the REAR
SHADE switch located on the front overhead console.
Also, never store objects on the rear shelf because they
may get caught in the sunshade or be tossed about in
your vehicle.
Manual Rear Side Door Sunshade
(If Equipped)
To use the manual rear side door sunshades, lower the
side windows and hook the top edge of the retractable
sunshades over the edge of the windows and raise the
windows. To remove the shades, lower the windows and
the hooks will disengage automatically.
Cellular Telephone (Option)
Your vehicle has been prewired for dealer installation of
the Cadillac Communiport integrated portable cellular
telephone system. The system has steering wheel
telephone controls and information output through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). Voice activation with
remote record and hands-free operation are standard
features. For more information, contact your dealer. A
user’s guide is provided with the telephone.
t
Accessory Power Outlets (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with accessory power
outlets that can be used to power additional devices
designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The
accessory power outlets are located in the center storage
compartment of the instrument panel and under each
storage lid of the rear door armrests. When the ignition
is on, or up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off,
you can plug in accessories that require electrical power.
Power to the outlets will shut off 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned off to help prevent the battery from
draining. See “Inadvertant Power Battery Saver” in the
Index. Power supply to the accessory power outlets or
cigarette lighters can be changed from 10 minutes to full
time by changing some fuses. See your dealer
for assistance.
Leaving an accessory on for an extended period of time
(i.e. airport stay or storage) or if a fuse is in the wrong
place may drain the vehicle’s battery.
OnStarR System (If Equipped)
OnStar is a vehicle communications service. The
following services are available through subscription
with OnStar and are available 24 hours a day:
Emergency Services
D Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
D Theft Notification and Stolen Vehicle Tracking
D Roadside Assistance with Location
D Remote Diagnostics
D OnStar MED-NET
D Accident Assist
Convenience Services
D Remote Door Unlock
D Route Support
D Concierge Services
D Ride Assist
A complete user’s guide is provided with the OnStar
System. For more information contact OnStar at
1-888-ONSTAR7.
2-61
Assist Handles
Sunroof (Option)
A handle above each door can be used when getting out
of your vehicle.
Umbrella Holder
The driver’s and passenger’s front seat cushion comes
equipped with an umbrella holder. Gently slide the
umbrella into the slot located under the front portion of
the driver’s or passenger’s seat cushion.
Floor Mats
Your vehicle is equipped with rubber-backed front and
rear floor mats. Keep them clean by vacuuming and
using a spot cleaner, if necessary. Do not machine wash.
The two control switches to operate the sunroof are
located on the overhead console and include VENT,
open and close.
The control switches work only when the ignition is on
or the Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.
2-62
To open the glass panel and sunshade, press and hold
the ROOF switch rearward to the first position. The
sunshade can also be opened by hand. To close the glass
panel, press and hold the ROOF switch forward. As the
glass panel closes, it will open slightly toward the vent
to provide a better seal. The sunshade can only be closed
by hand.
HomeLinkR Transmitter
To express-open the glass panel to a partially open
position, press and release the ROOF switch reward to
the second position. The glass panel may be fully
opened by pressing the ROOF switch again.
To stop the glass panel when express opening, press
either the ROOF or VENT switch in any direction.
If you press and hold the ROOF switch in the express
open position for more than one second, the express
open operation will be over-ridden and the sunroof will
stop when the switch is released.
To vent the glass panel, press and hold the VENT switch
in the open position. The sunshade must be opened by
hand. To close the glass panel, press and hold the VENT
switch in the close position.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
2-63
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
safety feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door you are programming.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
2-64
1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter
channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down
the two outside buttons on the HomeLink
Transmitter until the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly (after 20 seconds). Then release the buttons.
This procedure initializes the memory and erases any
previous settings for all three channels.
2. Decide which one of the three channels you want to
program. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter
about 2 to 5 inches (5 to 13) away from the surface
of the HomeLink Transmitter so that you can still see
the indicator light.
3. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter
button and the desired button on the HomeLink
Transmitter. Continue to press both buttons through
Step 4.
4. Hold down both buttons until you see the indicator
light on the HomeLink Transmitter flash slowly and
then rapidly. The rapid flashing indicates that the
HomeLink Transmitter has been programmed.
Release both buttons once the indicator light starts to
flash rapidly.
If you have trouble programming the HomeLink
Transmitter, make sure that you have followed the
directions exactly as described. The HomeLink
Transmitter may not work with older garage door
openers that do not meet current Federal Consumer
Safety Standards. If you cannot program the transmitter
after repeated attempts, refer to “Rolling Code
Programming” later in this section or contact the
HomeLink Transmitter manufacturer at
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter
in case you need to erase and reprogram the
HomeLink Transmitter.
Canadian Owners: During programming, the
hand-held transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting after one or two seconds. In this case, you
should press and re-press the button on the hand-held
transmitter every two seconds without ever releasing the
button on the HomeLink Transmitter. Release both
buttons when the indicator light on the HomeLink
Transmitter begins to flash rapidly.
Operating the HomeLink Transmitter
Press and release the appropriate button on the
HomeLink Transmitter. The indicator light comes on
while the signal is being transmitted.
The HomeLink Transmitter is disabled when the
VALET lockout button inside the glove box is activated.
For more information, see “Valet Lockout Button” in
the Index.
If the hand-held transmitter appears to program the
HomeLink Transmitter but does not open your garage
door, and if the garage door opener was manufactured
after 1996, the garage door opener may have a “rolling
code” system. A rolling code system changes the code
of the garage door opener every time you open or close
the garage door.
To determine if you have this system, press the button
on the HomeLink Transmitter that you have
programmed already. If the indicator light on the
HomeLink Transmitter flashes rapidly for two seconds
and then turns solid, the garage door opener has a
rolling code system. In a rolling code system, the
garage door motor head unit must be trained to the
HomeLink Transmitter.
2-65
“Rolling Code” Programming
If you have not previously programmed the hand-held
transmitter to the HomeLink Transmitter, see
“Programming the HomeLink Transmitter” listed
previously. If you have completed this programming
already, you now need to train the garage door opener
motor head unit to recognize the HomeLink Transmitter.
Refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual for
the proper transmitter training procedure for your garage
door opener brand.
1. Find the training button on the garage door opener
motor head unit. The exact location and color of the
button may vary by garage door opener brand. If you
have difficulty finding the training button, refer to
your garage door opener owner’s manual.
2. Press the training button on the garage door opener
motor head unit.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds to start
Step 3.
2-66
3. Return to the HomeLink Transmitter in your vehicle
and firmly press and release the HomeLink
Transmitter button you have already programmed for
two to three seconds. Press and release the button
again (you may need to do this step up to three
times) to make sure that the HomeLink Transmitter
has been trained to the garage door opener motor
head unit. Check that the training was successful.
The garage door opener should now recognize the
HomeLink Transmitter. You may either use the
HomeLink Transmitter or the hand-held transmitter to
open the garage door.
If after following these instructions, you still have
problems training the garage door opener, contact the
HomeLink Transmitter manufacturer at
1-800-355-3515.
Erasing Channels
Accessories
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.
Accessories for the HomeLink Transmitter are available
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
additional information, please call 1-800-355-3515.
2-67
The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System
2-68
The main components of the instrument panel are:
A. Air Outlets
I. Night Vision Controls
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
J. Hood Release
C. HVAC Steering Wheel Controls (or Cellular
Telephone Controls, If Equipped)
K. Cruise Control
D. Cluster
M. Cruise Control
E. Audio Steering Wheel Controls
N. Radio
F. Driver Information Center Control Buttons
O. Ashtray
G. Electronic Climate Controls
P. Glove Box
L. Horn
H. Lamp Controls
2-69
Digital Cluster (If Equipped)
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re
going, how much fuel you’re using and many of the other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
2-70
Analog Cluster (If Equipped)
United States version shown, Canada similar
2-71
Speedometer and Odometer
English/Metric Button
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). The
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
By pressing this button, you
can go back and forth
from English (miles) to
metric (kilometers).
You may wonder what happens if a vehicle has to have a
new odometer installed. The new one may read the
correct mileage. This is because your vehicle’s computer
has stored the mileage in memory.
Trip Odometer
Press this button, to tell how
far you’ve traveled since
you last set the trip
odometer back to zero.
Other readings such as temperature, fuel and trip
odometer also go back and forth between English
and metric.
Display Mode
On the analog cluster, this button is located between the
trip odometer and ENG/Metric button. Press DSPL
MODE to turn the backlighting and the digital speed
image on and off.
On the digital cluster, press DSPL MODE to turn the
digital displays other than the speedometer and gear
display on and off.
2-72
Vehicle Speed Limiter
Engine Speed Limiter
This feature prevents your vehicle from exceeding
speeds that the tires are not rated for. When this
happens, the engine’s fuel supply is shut off. When the
vehicle speed slows, the fuel supply will come on again.
This feature prevents the engine from operating at too
many revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine’s
rpm are critically high, the fuel supply to the engine is
shut off. When the engine speed slows, the fuel supply
will come on again. This helps prevent damage to
the engine.
Tachometer (Analog Cluster Only)
This gage indicates the
engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the red area or engine damage may occur.
2-73
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
See “Driver Information Center” in the Index.
2-74
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON, a chime will come on
for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds, then
it will flash for about
70 seconds.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the nor
the light will come on.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light will
come on briefly, but the chime will not sound.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG or the symbol of an air
bag. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors,
the air bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
United States
Canada
This light will come on when you start your vehicle, and
it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go
out. This means the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
2-75
Charging System Light
When you turn the key to
ON, this light will come on
briefly to show that the
generator and battery
charging systems
are working.
If this light stays on, you need service and you should
take your vehicle to the dealer at once. To save your
battery until you get there, turn off all accessories.
Brake System Warning and Park Brake
Indicator Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it
doesn’t come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready
to warn you if there’s
a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
2-76
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light(s) will
come on when you start
your engine and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or
comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t
on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also
on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a
problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake System
Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-77
Traction Control System Warning Light
The traction control system warning light may come on
for the following reasons:
D If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control system
will turn off and the warning light will come on.
D If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
United States
Canada
This warning light should come on briefly as you start
the engine.
If the warning light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. If it
stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, there may be
a problem with your traction control system and your
vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on,
the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
2-78
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This light tells you that your
engine has overheated. You
should stop your vehicle
and turn the engine off as
soon as possible. A warning
chime should also sound if
this light comes on.
As a check, the light should come on for a few seconds
when you start your engine. See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
Analog Cluster
Digital Cluster
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, the engine is
too hot.
That reading means the same thing as the warning
light -- the engine coolant has overheated.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
2-79
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light in the United
States or Check Engine Light in Canada)
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
2-80
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or
CHECK ENGINE light comes on and a chime will
sound to indicate that there is a problem and service is
required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transaxle,
exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the
replacement of the original tires with other than
those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls
and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or
CHECK ENGINE light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
This may also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
D Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
2-81
If the Light Is On Steady
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A
few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Are you low on fuel?
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of
air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The
system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. See
“Filling Your Tank” in the Index. It will take a few
driving trips to turn the light off.
2-82
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Oil Pressure Light
This light tells you if there
could be a problem with
your engine oil pressure.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is
on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This may take several days of routine
driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does
not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center
to prepare the vehicle for inspection.
The light goes on when you turn your key to ON. It goes
off once you start your engine. That’s a check to be sure
the light works. If it doesn’t come on, be sure to have it
fixed so it will be there to warn you if something
goes wrong.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
isn’t flowing through your engine properly. You could
be low on oil and you might have some other
system problem.
2-83
Security Light
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
For information regarding
this light, see “Theft
Deterrent-System” in
the Index.
Fog Lamp Light (If Equipped)
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
2-84
This light will come on
when the fog lamp button
is pressed. For more
information about the fog
lamps, see “Fog Lamps” in
the Index.
Lights On Reminder
United States
Fuel Gage
Canada
This light comes on as a reminder that your headlamps
are on.
Analog (United States)
Analog (Canada)
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the tank. It
works only when the
ignition is in ON.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set your
vehicle’s cruise control.
Digital
2-85
If the fuel supply gets down to approximately three
gallons (11.4 L) of fuel remaining in the tank, the
FUEL LEVEL LOW message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
On the digital cluster, if the fuel is less than
approximately 1.2 gallons (4.7 L) the “E” segment on
the gage will flash.
Fuel Data Display (Digital Cluster)
The fuel data display tells
you all you about the fuel
economy and how far
you can travel with the
fuel remaining.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and do
not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
D At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.
D GAL FUEL USED on the Driver Information Center
does not correspond exactly to the amount of fuel
remaining as shown on the fuel gage.
D The gage may change when you turn, stop or
speed up.
The average fuel economy (AVG) display shows the
average miles per gallon.
To reset the average fuel economy, press the INFO
button until the MPG AVG is displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). Press and hold the INFO
RESET button until both the fuel data display and
DIC display reads 0.0.
2-86
The RANGE display shows how far the computer thinks
you can travel with the fuel that is in the tank. The
computer does not know what driving conditions will be
like for the rest of your trip, so the range is estimated
based on the recent fuel economy. Therefore, the range
reading may change as your driving habits change.
Going from city to highway driving may increase the
range reading.
DIC Controls and Displays
If the range display shows LO, you should stop for fuel
as soon as possible.
On the analog cluster, fuel data can be obtained by
pressing the INFO button. See “Driver Information
Center” in the Index.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
This display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver
personalization features and warning/status messages.
INFO: Pressing this button up or down will display the
MILES RANGE (Analog Cluster), MPG AVG, MPG
INST, GAL FUEL USED, AVG MPH, TIMER,
BATTERY VOLTS, RPM TACHOMETER (Digital
Cluster), ENGINE OIL LIFE, TRANS FLUID LIFE,
PHONE (If Equipped), FEATURE PROGRAMMING
and Blank Display.
2-87
INFO RESET: Pressing this button will reset the
MPG AVG, GAL FUEL USED, MPH AVG, TIMER,
ENGINE OIL LIFE, TRANS FLUID LIFE, when each
mode is individually selected. For more information
about the trip odometer, see “Odometer” in the Index.
ON/OFF: In feature programming mode, pressing this
button turns the Memory and Personalization Features
on and off and starts and stops the timer.
MILES RANGE: (Analog Cluster Only.) This message
shows about how many miles you can drive without
refilling your fuel tank. Once the range drops below 40
miles (64 km) remaining, the display will show LOW.
MPG AVG (Reset): Press the INFO button to display
the MPG AVG (Average Fuel Economy).
GAL FUEL USED (Reset): Press the INFO button to
display the GAL FUEL USED on the DIC.
AVG MPH (Reset): Press the INFO button to display
the AVG MPH (Average Speed).
TIMER: This feature is like a stopwatch, in that you
can clock the time it takes to get from one point
to another.
To operate, press the INFO button to display TIMER.
Each of the fields for the hours, minutes and seconds are
two numeric digits.
2-88
Once TIMER 00:00:00 is displayed, press the ON/OFF
button to start the timing feature. Press the ON/OFF
button again to stop it. If you will be starting and
stopping your vehicle, during a trip for instance, the
TIMER feature will automatically start timing where it
left off when you last stopped. To reset it, press and hold
the INFO RESET button until the display reads TIMER
00:00:00. Press the INFO button to exit from the
TIMER Display.
ENGINE OIL LIFE (Reset): Press the INFO button to
display ENGINE OIL LIFE, then press and hold the
INFO RESET button until 100% ENGINE OIL LIFE is
displayed. (This only needs to be reset after you have
had the oil changed.)
TRANSMISSION FLUID LIFE MONITOR: Under
normal conditions, the rate of deterioration of the
transmission fluid is slow. See the Maintenance
Schedule booklet for proper fluid and change intervals.
Press the INFO button to display TRANS FLUID LIFE,
then press and hold the INFO RESET button until 100%
TRANS FLUID LIFE is displayed. (This only needs to
be reset after you have had the fluid changed.)
ENG/MET: Press this button to display information in
the English (miles) or metric (kilometers) system.
Driver Information Center (DIC) Messages
These messages will appear if there is a problem sensed
in one of your vehicle’s systems. Vehicles that are first
sold in Canada will have a number after each message.
This number helps to identify the problem. You must
then press INFO or INFO RESET to clear the display
screen for further use. However, be sure to take any
message that appears on the display screen seriously and
note that pressing the INFO or INFO RESET button will
only make the message disappear, not the problem.
Most messages can be removed from the display by
pressing the INFORMATION or RESET Digital Control
buttons, (if equipped) or by pressing the INFO RESET
or INFO Analog Control buttons (if equipped) while the
message is being displayed.
DIC messages can also be displayed in French, German,
Spanish and Japanese. Contact your dealer to have the
language display adjusted for your vehicle.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING - 7: This message will
appear if the battery is not being charged. Have the
electrical system checked by your dealership at your
earliest convenience.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE - 27: This message is
displayed when the vehicle has detected that the battery
voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable point. The
battery saver system will start reducing certain features
of the vehicle that you may not be able to notice. At
the point that features are disabled, this message is
displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save the
charge in the battery. Turn off unnecessary accessories
to allow the battery to recharge.
BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH - 8: This message
shows that the electrical charging system is
overcharging (more than 16 volts). To avoid being
stranded, have the electrical system checked by your
dealership. You can reduce the charging overload by
using the accessories. Turn on the lamps and radio, set
the climate control on AUTO and the fan speed on HI,
and turn the rear window defogger on. You can monitor
battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button.
The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts when the engine
is running.
2-89
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW - 6: This message will
appear when the electrical system is charging less than
10 volts or if the battery has been drained. If this
message appears immediately after starting, it is possible
that the generator can still recharge the battery. The
battery should recharge while driving but may take a
few hours to do so. Consider using an auxiliary charger
(be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions) to
boost the battery after returning home or to a final
destination. If this message appears while driving or
after starting your vehicle and stays on, have it checked
immediately to determine the cause of this problem. To
help the generator recharge the battery quickly, you can
reduce the load on the electrical system by turning off
the accessories. You can monitor battery voltage on the
DIC by pressing the INFO button. The normal range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL - 82: This means that the life
of the engine oil has expired and it should be changed
within 200 miles. See “Engine Oil” and “Filter
Recommendations” in the Maintenance Schedule
booklet. After an oil change, the Oil Life Indicator must
be reset. See “Oil Life Indicator, How to Reset” in
the Index.
2-90
CHANGE TRANS FLUID - 47: This message will
appear when it is time to replace the transaxle fluid. See
the Maintenance Schedule booklet for the proper fluid
and change intervals.
CHECK BRAKE FLUID - 37: This message will
display if the ignition is in ON to inform the driver that
the brake fluid level is low. Have the brake system
serviced by a technician as soon as possible. See “Brake
System Warning Light” in the Index.
CHECK COOLANT LEVEL - 2: This message
will appear when there is a low level of engine coolant.
Have the cooling system serviced by a technician as
soon as possible.
CHECK FUEL GAGE - 50: (Analog Cluster Only)
This message will appear when the fuel supply is less
than 5 gallons (18.9 L) and the display is turned off.
A single chime will also sound when this message
is displayed.
CHECK GAS CAP - 61: This message will appear if
the gas cap has not been fully tightened. You should
recheck your gas cap to ensure that it’s fully tightened.
CHECK OIL LEVEL - 36: For correct operation of
the low oil sensing system, your vehicle should be on a
level surface. A false CHECK OIL LEVEL message
may appear if the vehicle is parked on grades. The oil
level sensing system does not check for actual oil level
if the engine has been off for a short period of time, and
the oil level is never sensed while the engine is running.
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears, and your
vehicle has been parked on level ground with the engine
off for at least 30 minutes, the oil level should be
checked by observing the oil dipstick. Prior to checking
the oil level, be sure the engine has been off for a few
minutes and your vehicle is on a level surface. Then
check the dipstick and add oil if necessary. See “Engine
Oil” in the Index.
CHECK WASHER FLUID - 25: This message will
appear to indicate that the washer solvent container
needs refilling.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR - 140: This message will
display anytime the key is in ON and the driver’s door is
open or ajar. A chime will also sound when the vehicle’s
speed is greater than 3 mph (4.8 km/h).
DRIVER NO. X (1 OR 2) : This message will be
displayed with the key in ON and while entering Feature
Programming, but only if the vehicle is equipped with
memory seats. The message will show which driver is
activating the personalization feature. It will only stay
on for five seconds. This message can be customized for
you by your dealer.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT, IDLE ENGINE - 44:
This message will appear when the engine coolant
temperature is over 262_F (128_C). Stop and allow your
vehicle to idle in PARK (P) until it cools down and the
message is removed. Do not increase engine speed
above a normal idle. If it does not cool down, turn off
the engine and have it serviced before driving it again.
Severe engine damage can result from an overheated
engine. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
ENGINE HOT-AC OFF - 16: This message displays
when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal
operating temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning compressor is automatically
turned off. When the coolant temperature returns to
normal, the A/C operation will automatically resume.
You can continue to drive your vehicle. If this message
continues to appear, have the system repaired as soon as
possible to avoid compressor damage.
2-91
ENGINE OVERHEATED, STOP ENGINE - 42: This
message will appear when the engine has overheated.
Stop and turn the engine off immediately to avoid severe
engine damage. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
A multiple chime will also sound when this message
is displayed.
ENGINE POWER REDUCED - 41: This message
informs you that the vehicle is reducing engine power
because the transaxle is being placed in gear under
conditions that may cause damage to the vehicle’s
engine, transaxle or ability to accelerate.
FUEL LEVEL LOW - 11: This message serves as a
warning that the fuel level in the tank is critically low.
Stop for fuel soon. A single chime will also sound when
this message is displayed.
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED - 23: If it’s dark enough
outside and the headlamps and Twilight SentinelR
controls are off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
message will display on the DIC. This message
informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps is
recommended even though the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) are still illuminated. It has become dark enough
outside to require the headlamps and/or other exterior
lamps. This message will also appear if the optional
Rainsense wiping feature is on and the Twilight
SentinelR is off.
t
2-92
ICE POSSIBLE - 13: This message appears when the
outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy
road conditions.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR - 142: The left rear door
is open or ajar when this message appears. The ignition
must be in ON and the transaxle not in PARK (P) for
this message to display. A chime will also sound when
the vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (4.8 km/h).
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE - 35: If this
message appears while the engine is running, stop the
engine and do not operate it until the cause of low oil
pressure is corrected. Severe damage to the engine can
result. A multiple chime will also sound when this
message is displayed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR - 141: The passenger’s
door is open or ajar when this message appears. The
ignition must be in ON and the transaxle not in
PARK (P) for this message to display. A chime will
also sound when the vehicle’s speed is greater than
3 mph (4.8 km/h).
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR - 143: The right rear
door is open or ajar when this message appears. The
ignition must be in ON and the transaxle not in
PARK (P) for this message to display. A chime will also
sound when the vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph
(4.8 km/h).
SERVICE AC SYSTEM - 14: This message
appears when the electronic sensors that control the air
conditioning and heating systems are no longer working.
Have the climate control system serviced if you notice a
drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
SERVICE AIR BAG - 83: There is a problem with the
supplemental inflatable restraint (air bag) system when this
message appears. Let only a qualified technician work on
your vehicle. See your dealership for service at once.
SERVICE CHARGING SYS - 102: This message
will display when a problem with the charging system
has been detected. Have your vehicle serviced at
your dealership.
SERVICE ELECTRICAL SYS - 106: This message
will display if an electrical problem has occurred within
the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) or the ignition
switch. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealership.
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM - 101: The Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) has detected a problem within
the fuel system when this message appears. See your
dealership for service.
SERVICE STABILITY SYS - 54 : If you ever see the
SERVICE STABILITY SYS message, it means there
may be a problem with your stability enhancement
system. If you see this message, try to reset the system
(stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine again). If
the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message still comes on,
it means there is a problem. You should see your dealer
for service. Reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
A single chime will also sound when this message
is displayed.
STABILITY SYS ENGAGED - 55 : You may see the
STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message on the Driver
Information Center. It means that an advanced,
computer-controlled system has come on to help your
vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you’re
steering. This stability enhancement system activates
when the computer senses that your vehicle is just
starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice or
other slippery spot on the road. When the system is on,
you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brake
pedal. This is normal.
SERVICE IDLE CONTROL - 107: A problem
with the idle control has occurred when this message
displays. Take your vehicle to your dealership
for service.
2-93
When the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message is on,
you should continue to steer in the direction you want to
go. The system is designed to help you in bad weather or
other difficult driving situations by making the most of
whatever road conditions will permit. If the STABILITY
SYS ENGAGED message comes on, you’ll know that
something has caused your vehicle to start to spin, so
you should consider slowing down. A single chime will
also sound when this message is displayed.
SERVICE STEERING - 127: This message is
displayed when a problem has been detected in the
MagnasteerR variable effort steering system. If message
comes on, service is required.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS - 84: This message is
displayed to indicate that the suspension system is not
operating properly. To correct this problem, have your
vehicle serviced at your dealership.
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM - 34: This message
means there is a problem in the Personalized
Automotive Security System (PASS-KeyR III). A fault
has been detected in the system which means that the
PASS-Key III system is disabled and is not protecting
the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts, however, you
may want to take your vehicle to a proper service center
before turning off the engine.
2-94
SERVICE TRANSMISSION - 100: See your dealer
for repair.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON - 3: This message is
displayed when a non-emissions related powertrain
malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by a
technician as soon as possible.
SPEED LIMITED TO 90 - 113: A failure in the
suspension control system has occurred when this
message appears. The Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) determines the speed to which your vehicle
is limited. Have your vehicle serviced if this
message appears.
STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY - 33: This
message will appear when the Personalized Automotive
Security System (PASS-KeyR III) senses that an
improper ignition key is being used to try to start the
vehicle. Check the ignition key for damage. If it is
damaged, it may need to be replaced. If you see no
damage, remove the key and try to start the vehicle
again. If it still does not start, try another ignition key.
THEFT ATTEMPTED - 40: This message is
displayed if the theft system has detected a break-in
attempt while you were away from your vehicle.
TOP SPEED FUEL CUT-OFF - 111: This message
will appear when the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
senses that the maximum speed for your vehicle has
been reached. The speed of your vehicle will surge as
the fuel supply is cut off. This allows your vehicle to
stay in a safe tire operating range. The top speed is set
based on the top speed rating of the tires.
TRACTION ENGAGED - 91 : When your traction
control system is limiting wheel spin, the TRACTION
ENGAGED message will be displayed. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so
adjust your driving accordingly. This message will stay
on for a few seconds after the traction control system
stops limiting wheel spin.
TRACTION OFF - 89: This message will be displayed
after the traction control has been turned off by the
button on the center console.
TRACTION READY - 90: This message informs the
driver that the traction control system is available. This
occurs when the traction control switch on the console
has been returned to ON (pressing the button once turns
the traction control system off: pressing the button
again turns the system back on). This message will
automatically disappear from the display after
five seconds.
TRACTION SUSPENDED - 56: This message
displays when the traction control system has been
temporarily shut off because your vehicle’s brakes have
overheated. This message does not indicate a problem
with your vehicle’s traction control system. After a few
minutes, the traction control system will be available
again and the TRACTION READY message
will appear.
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE - 112: This message
indicates that the transaxle fluid in your vehicle is too
hot. Stop and allow your vehicle to idle until it cools
down or until this message is removed.
TRUNK OPEN - 24: This message indicates that the
trunk is open when the ignition is on.
TURN SIGNAL ON - 20: This message is a reminder,
after driving about a mile, that you have the turn signal
on. A multiple chime will also sound when this message
is displayed.
VEHICLE OVERSPEED - 52: This message is
displayed when the vehicle speed exceeds a certain limit
as required by some export countries. A continuous
chime will also sound when this message is displayed.
2-95
Vehicle Programming and Personalization
Features (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with personalization, you can
program certain features to a preferred setting for up to
two people. If your vehicle does not have
personalization then some of the features on your
vehicle have been programmed for all drivers. On all
vehicles, other features such as HVAC settings, radio
preset settings, exterior lighting at unlock, remote lock
and unlock confirmation, and automatic door locks have
already been programmed for your convenience. If the
vehicle is equipped with personalization then the seat
position, steering column position (if equipped) and
outside mirror position can also be programmed. The
Navigation screen preferences (if equipped) will remain
at the last set position.
If your vehicle is equipped with personalization the
driver’s preferences are recalled by pressing the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by
pressing the appropriate memory button “1” or “2”
located on the driver’s door. Please note that certain
features can be programmed not to recall until the key is
placed in the ignition. To change feature preferences you
must enter feature programming (see below).
2-96
Entering Feature Programming
To begin programming, the ignition must be in ON, your
vehicle in PARK (P), and if your vehicle has memory,
you must press the appropriate memory button “1” or
“2”, located on the driver’s door panel, prior to
programming. The display will show either “1” or “2”,
depending on which was selected. Press the INFO
button one or more times until the FEATURE
PROGRAMMING prompt appears on the DIC display.
Press the ON/OFF button to enter FEATURE
PROGRAMMING. To exit, press the INFO RESET or
INFO buttons.
Remote Recall Memory (If Equipped)
To enter feature programming, follow the instructions
listed previously, then press the down arrow on the
INFO button one or more times until the REMOTE
RECALL MEMORY prompt appears. To turn the
feature on, press the ON/OFF button until ON is
displayed on the DIC. The seat and mirror memory
settings that have been previously programmed can be
recalled by pressing the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter. The steering column will
move when the key is inserted in the ignition and turned
to ON. To turn the feature off, press the ON/OFF button
until OFF is displayed.
Key in Recall Memory (If Equipped)
Auto Exit Steering Wheel (If Equipped)
To enter feature programming, follow the instructions
listed previously, then press the down arrow on the
INFO button one or more times until the KEY IN
RECALL MEMORY prompt appears on the DIC
display. To turn the feature on, press the ON/OFF button
until ON appears. The seat and mirror memory settings
that have been previously programmed will be recalled
when the key is inserted in the ignition. The steering
column will move when the key is turned to ON.
To turn the feature off, press the ON/OFF button
until OFF appears.
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one or more
times until the AUTO EXIT STRG WHEEL prompt
appears on the DIC display. This feature will move the
column to the driver’s exit position when the key is
turned to OFF and the driver’s door is opened.
Auto Exit Seat (If Equipped)
To enter feature programming, follow the instructions
listed previously, then press the down arrow on the
INFO button one or more times until the AUTO EXIT
SEAT prompt shows on the DIC display. This feature
will move the seat to the driver’s exit position when the
key is turned out of ON and the driver’s door is opened.
To turn this feature on, press the ON/OFF button until
ON appears on the DIC. To turn this feature off, press
the ON/OFF button until OFF shows.
Remote Confirmation
This personalization feature allows the driver to
program the parking lamps to flash or to remain off
when the lock or unlock buttons on the remote keyless
entry transmitter are pressed and the horn to sound when
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed. Press the INFO button one or more times until
the FEATURE PROGRAMMING prompt appears on
the DIC display. Press the ON/OFF button to enter
FEATURE PROGRAMMING. To exit, press the
INFO RESET button.
2-97
Lights Flash at Unlock
Horn Sounds at Lock
To enter feature programming follow the instructions
listed previously, then press the down arrow on the
INFO button one or more times until the LIGHTS
FLASH AT UNLOCK prompt appears. To turn this
feature on, press the ON/OFF button until ON is
displayed on the DIC. If all the doors are closed, the
parking lamps will flash twice when the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed. The
lamps will not flash if the manual parking lamps or
headlamps are active. To turn the feature off, press the
ON/OFF button until the OFF prompt appears.
To enter feature programming follow the instructions
listed previously, then press the down arrow on the
INFO button one or more times until the HORN
SOUNDS AT LOCK prompt appears on the DIC
display. To turn the feature on, press the ON/OFF button
until ON appears. If all the doors are closed, the horn
will sound once when the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed. To turn the feature
off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears.
Lights Flash at Lock
To enter feature programming, follow the instructions
listed previously, then press the down arrow on the
INFO button one or more times until the LIGHTS
FLASH AT LOCK prompt appears on the DIC display.
To turn the feature on, press the ON/OFF button until
ON appears. If all the doors are closed, the parking
lamps will flash once when the lock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed. To turn the
feature off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears.
This feature will not work if any door is open.
2-98
This feature will not work if any door is open.
Exterior Lights at Unlock
This personalization feature enables the driver to
program the exterior lamps to turn on or to remain off
when using the remote keyless entry transmitter to
unlock the vehicle.
During dark or night conditions, if exterior lighting is
selected, the parking lamps, taillamps, reverse lamps,
high-beam headlamps, etc. will turn on for about
20 seconds or until a door is opened, the key is turned
out of OFF or the remote keyless entry transmitter is
used to lock the vehicle.
Press the INFO button one or more times until the
FEATURE PROGRAMMING prompt appears on the
DIC display. Press the ON/OFF button to enter
FEATURE PROGRAMMING. To exit, press the INFO
RESET button. Press the down arrow on the INFO
button one or more times until the EXT LIGHTS AT
UNLOCK prompt appears.
Driver Unlock in PARK (P)
To turn the feature on, press the ON/OFF button until
ON is displayed. To turn the feature off, press the
ON/OFF button until OFF is displayed.
To enter feature programming follow the instructions
listed previously, then press the down arrow on the
INFO button one or more times until the DRIVER
UNLOCK IN PARK (P) prompt appears. This feature
will automatically unlock only the driver’s door when
the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P). To turn the feature
on, press ON/OFF until ON is displayed on the DIC.
To turn the feature off, press ON/OFF until OFF
is displayed.
Doors Lock in Gear
Driver Unlock Key Off
To enter feature programming follow the instructions
listed previously, then press the down arrow on the
INFO button one or more times until the DOORS
LOCK IN GEAR prompt appears. This feature will
automatically lock all doors when the vehicle is shifted
out of PARK (P) and all doors are closed. To turn the
feature on, press ON/OFF until ON is displayed on the
DIC. To turn the feature off, press ON/OFF until OFF
is displayed.
To enter feature programming follow the instructions
listed previously, then press the down arrow on the
INFO button one or more times until the DOORS
UNLOCK KEY OFF prompt appears. This feature will
automatically unlock the driver’s door when the ignition
key is turned to OFF. To turn the feature on, press
ON/OFF until ON is displayed on the DIC. To turn the
feature off, press ON/OFF until OFF is displayed.
2-99
Doors Unlock in PARK (P)
Mirror to Curb In Reverse (If Equipped)
To enter feature programming follow the instructions
listed previously, then press the down arrow on the
INFO button one or more times until the DOORS
UNLOCK IN PARK prompt appears. This feature will
automatically unlock all doors when the vehicle is
shifted into PARK (P). To turn the feature on, press
ON/OFF until ON is displayed on the DIC. To turn the
feature off, press ON/OFF until OFF is displayed.
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one or more
times until the MIRROR TO CURB IN REV prompts
appears on the DIC display. This feature will move the
passenger’s outside rearview mirror to a curb view
position when the shifter is placed in REVERSE (R) and
it will return the mirror to the last known driving position
when the shifter is moved out of REVERSE (R). To turn
this feature on, press the ON/OFF button until ON is
displayed on the DIC. To turn the feature off, press the
ON/OFF button until OFF is displayed. For more
information, see “Curb View Assist Mirror” in the Index.
Doors Unlock Key Off
To enter feature programming follow the instructions
listed previously, then press the down arrow on the
INFO button one or more times until the DOORS
UNLOCK KEY OFF prompt appears. This feature will
automatically unlock all doors when the ignition key is
turned to OFF. To turn the feature on, press ON/OFF
until ON is displayed on the DIC. To turn the feature
off, press ON/OFF until OFF is displayed.
2-100
Driver’s Names Set/Recall (If Equipped)
After the FEATURE PROGRAMMING prompt is
displayed on the DIC and the ON/OFF button is pressed,
the prompts DRIVER NO 1 or DRIVER NO 2 will
appear. These prompts correspond to which remote
keyless entry transmitter button or memory recall button
has been pressed on the driver’s door armrest. You may
have your name and a second driver’s name displayed
here, replacing the prompts DRIVER NO 1 and
DRIVER NO 2. A dealership can program your vehicle
to display the names you want. The names will appear
whenever the key is turned to ON only if remote keyless
entry transmitters 1 or 2 are used to enter the vehicle or
buttons 1 or 2 on the driver’s door are pressed.
Comfort Controls and Radio System Personalization
Oil Life Indicator
These features allow both drivers to personalize their
own climate control settings as well as their radio
settings. For more information, see “Climate Control
Personalization” and “Radio Personalization” in
the Index.
This feature lets you know when to change the engine
oil. It’s based on the engine oil temperatures and your
driving patterns. To see the display, press the INFO
button several times until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears.
If you see 99% ENGINE OIL LIFE, 99 percent of your
current oil life remains.
Continuous Variable Road Sensing Suspension
(CVRSS) (If Equipped)
The CVRSS automatically adjusts the ride of your
vehicle. Automatic ride control is achieved through a
computer used to control and monitor the suspension
system. The controller receives input from various
sensors to determine the proper system response. If the
controller detects a problem within the system, the DIC
will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message.
If this message appears, have your vehicle serviced at
your dealership.
The DIC may display a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
message. Always keep a written record of the mileage
and date when you changed your oil. For more
information, see the Maintenance Schedule booklet. If
you see CHANGE ENGINE OIL, it means the oil life is
gone and you should change the oil right away. The
system doesn’t check how much oil you have, so you’ll
still have to check for that. To see how, see “Engine Oil”
in the Index.
When the oil is changed, you’ll need to reset the system.
See “Oil Life Indicator, How to Reset” in the Index.
2-101
Night Vision System (Option)
The Night Vision System can help you see better when
you drive at night. The system works by sensing heat
given off by objects in its field of view. Warmer objects,
such as pedestrians, animals and other moving vehicles,
will appear whiter. Colder objects, such as the sky, signs
and parked vehicles, will appear darker.
2-102
Use this system as an aid to help you in seeing objects
beyond the headlamps. Do this by occasionally glancing
at the image as you would a rearview mirror. Do not
stare at the image.
The Night Vision System can be operated if:
D
D
D
D
The brightness control is in any position except OFF.
It is dark enough outside.
The headlamps or foglamps (if equipped) are on.
The ignition is turned to ON.
The controls are located to
the left of and below the
steering wheel. They are
used to adjust the brightness
and location of the image.
Adjust the IMAGE
control so the image is as
low as possible while
remaining visible.
When the system comes on, you’ll see the Night Vision
System symbol in the image. After about one minute,
you should see the view of the road ahead. If you don’t
see the image after about two minutes (on cold days it
may take longer for the image to display), there may be
something wrong with the system. See your dealer
for service.
CAUTION:
If the Night Vision System image is too bright, or
too high in your field of view, it may take you
more time to see things you need to see when it’s
dark outside. Be sure to keep the image dim and
placed low in your field of view.
Slide the dimmer control until the image is no brighter
than necessary to clearly and comfortably see the image.
2-103
The Night Vision System image appears as a “heat
image” that looks something like a black and white
photographic negative. It appears in front of the driver
just above the front edge of the hood.
2-104
Remember that the Night Vision System can only help
you see objects that are warmer or colder than the
surroundings. It can’t sense things like brake lights, turn
signals or emergency flashers, traffic lights or signs.
In dry, clear weather, the system can see pedestrians,
animals and the direction of the road ahead. In light rain,
light snow or light fog the image may not be as clear
and you may not be able to see the direction of the road
ahead. In more severe weather conditions, the image
may be unclear and not usable.
CAUTION:
Don’t use the Night Vision System to replace
your normal view of the road ahead. It can’t tell
you how far away things are. It senses only
warmer or colder objects, not all objects. Driving
by staring at the image might cause you not to see
important objects in the road ahead. If you don’t
see something in time, you could have a crash in
which you and others could be injured. Use the
Night Vision System only as a driving aid.
It is also important to keep your windshield, the HUD
(Head-Up Display for the Night Vision System) lens and
the camera lens clean. If you do not keep everything
clean, system performance may be affected. The HUD
system is located on the driver’s side of the instrument
panel, next to the windshield and the camera is located
behind the center of the front grille.
Use only household glass cleaner and a soft cloth. Wipe
gently and dry thoroughly.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to scratch the HUD or camera
lenses when cleaning. Use only household glass
cleaner and a soft cloth. Wipe gently and dry
thoroughly. Also, do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the HUD lens located inside your
vehicle, because the cleaner could leak inside the
unit and cause damage.
The camera must also be aligned to work correctly. If
the camera needs adjustment, see your dealer. Do not
attempt to adjust the camera yourself.
2-105
Navigation (Option)
Navigation Display Controls
The display screen is located in the center on the
instrument panel. There are eight “hard” buttons and a
touch sensitive screen.
2-106
Your vehicle may be equipped with a turn by turn
navigation guidance system that includes a CD ROM
map media covering nine regional areas throughout the
contiguous United States. In addition, the system
includes intersection and freeway entrances, route
planning, a programmable address book, points of
interest, a list of restaurants, emergency phone numbers,
and a list of hotels and motels for all of the major cities
on each regional CD. The navigation system can also
communicate with the radio data system to receive
broadcast announcements on traffic, weather
information and emergency alert communications.
For more information on how to use this system, see
“Navigation” supplement.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) (Option)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist can help you to
determine how close an object is to your rear bumper
within a given area, making parking easier.
The URPA display is
located inside the vehicle,
above the rear window. It
has three color-coded lights
that can be seen through the
rearview mirror or by
turning around.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 MPH (5 km/h). When the system comes on, the
three lights on the display will illuminate to let you
know that the system is working. URPA senses how
close your vehicle is to an object. The distance is
determined by the four ultrasonic sensors located on the
rear bumper. When shifting into REVERSE (R) and an
object is detected, one of the following will occur:
2-107
A chime will sound the first time an object is detected.
If the URPA system is not functioning properly, the
display will flash red, indicating that there is a problem.
The light will also flash red while driving if a trailer is
attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or object is on the
back of, or hanging out of your trunk. The light will
continue to flash until the trailer or the object is
removed and your vehicle is driven forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h). It may also flash red if the ultrasonic
sensors are not kept clean. So be sure to keep your rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush or the
system may not work properly. If after cleaning the rear
bumper and driving forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h),
the display continues to flash red, see your dealer.
It may also flash red if your vehicle is moving in
REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Other conditions that may affect system performance
include things like the vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
URPA can detect objects 3 inches (7.6 cm) and wider,
and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) tall, but it cannot detect
objects that are above trunk level. In order for the rear
sensors to recognize an object, it must be within
operating range.
As always, drivers should use care when backing up a
vehicle. Always look behind you, being sure to check
for other vehicles, obstructions and blind spots. For
cleaning instructions, see “Cleaning Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
2-108
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-15
3-19
Comfort Controls
Climate Control Panel
Electronic Solar Sensor
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Rear Climate Control
Ventilation System
HVAC Steering Wheel Controls
Climate Control Personalization (If Equipped)
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Compact
Disc Player with Radio Data Systems (RDS) and
Digital Signal Processing (DSP) (If Equipped)
3-
3-28
3-38
3-39
3-39
3-43
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-45
3-46
3-48
3-48
3-48
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
MiniDisc Player with Radio Data Systems
(RDS) and Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
(If Equipped)
Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type
(PTY) Selections
Navigation/Radio System (Option)
CD Adapter Kits
Radio Personalization with Home and Away
Feature (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Diversity Antenna System
3-1
Comfort Controls
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob
This section tells you how to make your air system work
for you.
The knob adjusts the air temperature coming through the
system. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the
temperature and counterclockwise to decrease the
temperature. Press the knob to turn the system off.
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a
flow-through ventilation system described later in
this section.
Climate Control Panel
Passenger’s Side Temperature Button
With this feature, the right front passenger can control
the temperature of air for his/her own zone. The
passenger can select a warmer or cooler temperature
from the driver’s setting.
To turn the system on, press the PASS/TEMP button.
Press the up arrow to increase the temperature and
press the down arrow to decrease the climate setting.
Pressing the PASS/OFF button will turn off the
dual-zone function.
Rear Passenger Climate Control
Fan Button
The button with the fan symbol adjusts the fan speed.
Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and the down
arrow to decrease fan speed.
3-2
With this feature, the rear passenger (s) can control the
temperature of the air for the rear compartment.
To adjust the direction of the air flow, press the MODE
button, to adjust the blower speed, press the fan symbol
button and to adjust the temperature, press the TEMP
button. The driver can also override the system and select
a PASS OFF button to turn off the rear climate controls.
See “Rear Climate Control” later in this section.
Outside Temperature Display
Automatic Operation
The outside temperature is always displayed when your
vehicle is running. You can change it from Fahrenheit to
Celsius by pressing the ENG/MET (English/metric)
button on the left side of the instrument panel cluster.
When the system is set for automatic operation, sensors
will control the air delivery mode. Air will come from
the floor, middle or windshield outlets. The fan speed
will vary as the system maintains the selected
temperature setting.
The outside temperature sensor is located near the front
grille. The sensor can be affected by road or engine heat
during idling, slow driving or when the engine is first
started after a short trip. In order to ensure proper
automatic climate control operation, the outside air
temperature display may not update as quickly as
expected. This is to allow the air surrounding the outside
temperature sensor to be as close to the actual outside
conditions as possible. This is determined by how much
time has elapsed since the vehicle has been turned off
and by vehicle speed.
Mode Button
Press the MODE button to deliver air through the floor,
middle or windshield outlets. The system will stay in the
selected mode until the MODE button is pressed again.
Press the up or down arrow to cycle through the
available modes.
Be careful not to put anything over the solar sensor
located in the middle of the instrument panel near the
windshield. This sensor is used by the automatic system
to regulate temperature.
To find your comfort zone, start with the 75_F (24_C)
setting and allow about 30 minutes for the system to
regulate. Turn the knob to adjust the temperature if
necessary. If you choose 60_F (16_C), the system will
remain at that maximum cooling setting and will not
regulate fan speed. If you choose the temperature of
90_F (32_C), the system will remain at that maximum
heating setting and will not regulate fan speed. Choosing
either maximum setting will not cause the system to heat
or cool any faster.
3-3
With the automatic setting, the air conditioning
compressor automatically cycles when needed to cool
the air. In cold weather, when the system senses the need
for heat, the airflow will be directed out the floor
outlets. As the interior temperature approaches a desired
setting, the blower speed will decrease. To maintain
interior comfort, the airflow may move to the instrument
panel air outlets and floor outlets (bi-level mode). On
bright sunny days in cold weather, the airflow may come
out of the air conditioning outlets (AC mode) to
maintain comfort and prevent stuffiness.
If you leave your vehicle, the system will remember the
control setting the next time you start your engine,
except for recirculation and defrost. Each ignition cycle
cancels recirculation, whereas, FRONT DEFROST will
change to auUse only household glass cleaner and a soft
cloth. Wipe gently and dry throughly.tomatic operation
when the ignition is shut off and then turned back on.
If your vehicle is sitting out on a hot day and you have it
set on AUTO, the air will first flow out the floor air
outlets for a few seconds. That is normal. This is to
expel hot air from the air outlets. As the air is cooled,
the airflow will move through the air conditioning
outlets. If you start your vehicle with the fan setting on
HI, it will skip the air conditioning purge.
AC: This setting directs airflow through the four
instrument panel outlets.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the outside air
temperature, engine coolant temperature or the time
since the engine was last started. As the coolant warms
up, the blower fan speed will gradually increase and air
will flow from the heater outlets, with some airflow to
the windshield to prevent fogging under most normal
conditions.
3-4
Manual Operation
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan
speed.
BI-LEVEL: This setting directs air into your
vehicle in two ways. Cool air is directed to the upper
portion of your body through the four instrument panel
outlets while warmed air is directed to the floor.
HEATER/DEFROST: This setting directs air to
the floor outlets and toward the windshield.
HEATER: This setting directs warmed air
through the floor outlets. Some warm air is diverted to
the windshield to minimize fogging.
DEFROST: Press this button to quickly remove
fog or frost from the windshield. This setting sends most
of the airflow to the windshield with only a small
amount to the floor outlets.
FAN SPEEDS: Press the AUTO. At this setting,
the fan speed is automatically controlled. If it is cold
outside, the blower may not run in the maximum high
fan speed right away. The system checks the
temperature of the engine coolant to assure it is warm
enough to provide heat. When the engine coolant is
warm, the controller allows the fan to gradually increase
to a higher speed. This prevents cold air from blowing
into the passenger compartment.
OFF: Press the knob to turn the system off. Fresh
air will continue to flow through the vehicle, and the
system will try to maintain the previously set
temperature. The outside temperature will show on
the display when the system is OFF.
AC: Press this button to turn the air conditioning on and
off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air inside
the vehicle. In the AUTO mode the air conditioning
compressor only operates when the system determines it
is needed. The display will show A/C OFF when the air
conditioning is off.
RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit the
amount of fresh air entering your vehicle. This is helpful
when you are trying to cool the air quickly or limit odors
entering your vehicle. In the AUTO mode, the system
will use recirculation as necessary to cool the air.
Pressing the recirculation button will change the
operation to a manual mode and the air will recirculate
non-stop. Press this button again to turn off the
recirculation feature.
If you notice the windows fogging, press the
recirculation button to exit the recirculation mode.
3-5
Electronic Solar Sensor
Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditioner to work its best.
Press the AUTO button or the TEMP knob to turn the
system on. The system will cool and dehumidify the air
inside the vehicle. Also while in the AUTO mode, the
system will use recirculation as necessary to cool the air.
You may also need to adjust the interior temperature and
the fan speed as needed.
The sensor monitors the sun’s solar radiation and is
located on top of the instrument panel near the
windshield. The ECC panel uses this information to
automatically make the necessary temperature and
airflow adjustments to maintain your comfort.
When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes
notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine speed
and power. This is normal because the system is
designed to cycle the compressor on and off to keep the
desired temperature.
Heating
Press the MODE button to select heater. Adjust the
interior temperature to a comfortable level and if the fan
speed needs adjusting, press the up or down arrow.
Outside air will be brought in and sent through the floor,
air conditioning or bi-level outlets (depending on the
condition). The heater works best if you keep your
windows closed while using it.
3-6
Defogging and Defrosting
On cool, humid days, use defog HEATER/DEFROST to
keep the windshield and side windows clear. Use defrost
to remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in
extremely humid or cold conditions.
Press the MODE button to select DEFROST. Adjust the
fan speed by pressing the fan button up or down. If you
select DEFROST from AUTO, the system will control
the fan speed. The temperature also needs to be adjusted
by turning the TEMP knob.
RECIRCULATION is not available in the defrost or
defog modes.
Rear Window Defogger
The lines you see on the
rear window warm the
glass. Press this button to
turn on the rear defogger.
With it, the rear window
and both outside rearview
mirrors are heated.
The system will automatically shut off after 10 minutes
of use. If you turn it on again, the defogger will operate
for about five minutes. However, if your vehicle is
traveling above 30 mph (48 kph) the system will not
shut off. You can also turn the defogger off by turning
off the ignition or by pressing the button again.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid or the
integrated rear window antenna, and the repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
3-7
Rear Climate Control
temperature of the air flow for his/her own zones. The
climate control has three buttons:
Mode: Press this button to adjust the direction of the
airflow. Press again to use the AUTO adjust mode and
let the system decide for you.
Fan: Press the button with the fan symbol on it to adjust
the blower speed.
Temp: Press this button to adjust the temperature.
The system also has a front AUTO button that can
automatically change the temperature of the rear seating
area, based on information from the front system. A
PASS-OFF button located on the front climate control
panel also allows the driver to turn off the rear passenger
seat controls from the front seat.
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear climate control.
With this system, the rear passengers can control the
3-8
Ventilation System
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside
air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or the air
conditioning fan is running.
Ventilation Tips
D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of the windows.
D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps circulate air throughout
your vehicle.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The front outlets are located in the center and at each
side of the instrument panel. You can adjust the
direction of airflow by moving the center control levers
or you can stop the airflow by moving the lever located
on each side of the outlets downward.
This ventilation system includes an air filter that helps to
remove dust, pollen, etc. from the air flowing into your
vehicle. A restriction in the airflow coming into the
passenger compartment could be the result of dirt in
the filter. For more information, see “Passenger
Compartment Air Filter Replacement” in the Index.
Also see the Maintenance Schedule booklet for when to
change the filter.
3-9
HVAC Steering Wheel Controls
Some heating and cooling
controls can be adjusted at
the steering wheel. Other
touch controls operate some
audio controls. See “Audio
Steering Wheel Controls”
in the Index.
FAN SPEED: Press the up arrow lever to increase
the fan speed and the down arrow lever to decrease
fan speed.
TEMP: Press the up arrow lever to increase the
temperature and the down arrow lever to
decrease temperature.
3-10
Climate Control Personalization
(If Equipped)
With this feature, your vehicle will recall the latest
climate control settings as adjusted the last time your
vehicle was operated. This feature allows two different
drivers to store and recall their own climate control
settings. The settings recalled by the climate control
system are determined by which remote keyless entry
transmitter (“1” or “2”) was used to enter the vehicle.
The number on the back of the remote keyless entry
transmitter corresponds to driver 1 or to driver 2. After
the unlock button is pressed on the remote keyless entry
transmitter or the ignition key is placed in the ignition
(the ignition must be turned to OFF), the climate control
settings will automatically adjust to where they were last
set. The settings can also be changed by briefly pressing
the memory seat buttons 1 or 2 located on the
driver’s door.
Audio Systems
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and how
to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clock
Press and hold HR or MN until the time display begins
to change. Release the button as you get close to the
correct time. The time may be set anytime the clock is
displayed. There is a two-second delay before the clock
goes into time-set mode.
Playing the Radio
PWR/VOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press the knob again to turn the system off. To
increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
HR or MN: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button.
3-11
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. Sources
include cassette and compact disc. The audio source
must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are
shown on the display. If a source is being used, it will be
underlined on the display. If none of the audio sources
are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the
display. Press this button again or press BAND to switch
back to the radio.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
Finding a Station
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons
for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button for less
than two seconds, the station you set will return.
BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has
two positions. Press this button to the first position to
manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button
is held at the first position for a few seconds, the radio
will continue tuning until this button is released. Press
this button to the second position and release to seek to
the next higher or lower radio station.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets because the
radio remembers them.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again to turn on the sound.
SCAN: Press this button for less than two seconds to
scan radio stations. The radio will go to a station, stop
for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
3-12
PRESET SCAN: Press and hold SCAN for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each of
your preset stations for five seconds. The radio will go
to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
stop for five seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press SCAN again to stop scanning. If a preset
station has weak reception, the radio will not stop at the
preset station.
Setting the Tone
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
tone control (BASS or TREBLE) is found. The radio
keeps separate tone settings for each band, each preset
and each source.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control, press
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select
the desired level.
To save the tone settings for your presets, press and hold
the numbered button for the desired preset for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep.
Adjusting the Speakers
SPEAKER: Press and release this button until the
desired BALANCE or FADE control is found.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or
FADE control, press the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on
this button to select the desired level.
Playing a Cassette Tape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will
begin playing as soon as it is inserted. When one side of
your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays the
other side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing
until the radio is on. If you want to insert a cassette tape
when the ignition is off, first press the eject button.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, TONE, LEVEL, and
SPEAKER controls just as you do for the radio. Other
controls may have different functions when a tape is inserted.
The display will show an underlined tape symbol. TAPE
PLAY will appear on the display when a tape is playing, with
an arrow to indicate which side of the tape is playing.
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it
could be that:
D The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down and try turning the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Flip the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
cassette tape may be damaged and should not be
used in the player. Try a new tape to be sure your
player is working properly.
D The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if your
tape is broken. Try a new tape.)
3-13
RW: Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The
radio will play while the tape rewinds. You may use
your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station
while in RW mode. Press the left arrow again to return
to playing speed.
FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another part
of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances.
You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another
radio station while in FF mode. Press the right arrow
again to return to playing speed.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button
to seek to the next or previous selection on the tape.
Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for TUNE-SEEK to work. The
sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few
seconds. The tape will go to a selection, stop for a few
seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to change the side of the tape
that is playing.
3-14
EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the cassette tape player to remove a tape. The
radio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio off
and/or the ignition off.
CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears on the display,
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold the eject button for three
seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator.
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
background noise from tapes. Dolby Noise Reduction
is manufactured under a license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Auto CrO2 allows the cassette tape player to adjust to
the type of cassette tape for clearer sound for CrO2
cassette tapes.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. Sources
include cassette and compact disc. The audio source
must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are
shown on the display. If a source is being used, it will be
underlined on the display. If none of the audio sources
are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the
display. Press this button again or press BAND to switch
back to the radio.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again to turn on the sound.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
Playing the Radio
PWR/VOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press the knob again to turn the system off. To
increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
HR or MN: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has
two positions. Press this button to the first position to
manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button
is held at the first position for a few seconds, the radio
will continue tuning until this button is released. Press
this button to the second position and release to seek to
the next higher or lower radio station.
SCAN: Press this button for less than two seconds to
scan radio stations. The radio will go to a station, stop
for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
3-15
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button for less
than two seconds, the station you set will return.
Setting the Tone
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
tone control (BASS or TREBLE) is found. The radio
keeps separate tone settings for each band, each preset
and each source.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control, press
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select
the desired level.
To save the tone settings for your presets, press and hold
the numbered button for the desired preset for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets because the
radio remembers them.
PRESET SCAN: Press and hold SCAN for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each of
your preset stations for five seconds. The radio will go
to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
stop for five seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press SCAN again to stop scanning. If a preset
station has weak reception, the radio will not stop at the
preset station.
3-16
Adjusting the Speakers
SPEAKER: Press and release this button until the
desired BALANCE or FADE control is found.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or
FADE control, press the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on
this button to select the desired level.
Playing a Cassette Tape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will
begin playing as soon as it is inserted. When one side of
your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays the
other side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing
until the radio is on. If you want to insert a cassette tape
when the ignition is off, first press the eject button.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, TONE, LEVEL,
and SPEAKER controls just as you do for the radio.
Other controls may have different functions when a tape
is inserted. The display will show an underlined tape
symbol. TAPE PLAY will appear on the display when a
tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side of
the tape is playing.
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it
could be that:
D The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down and try turning the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Flip the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
cassette tape may be damaged and should not be
used in the player. Try a new tape to be sure your
player is working properly.
D The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if your
tape is broken. Try a new tape.)
RW: Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The
radio will play while the tape rewinds. You may use
your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station
while in RW mode. Press the left arrow again to return
to playing speed.
FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another part
of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances.
You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another
radio station while in FF mode. Press the right arrow
again to return to playing speed.
TUNE SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button
to seek to the next or previous selection on the tape.
Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for TUNE SEEK to work. The
sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few
seconds. The tape will go to a selection, stop for a few
seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to change the side of the tape
that is playing.
3-17
EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the cassette tape player to remove a tape. The
radio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio off
and/or the ignition off.
CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears on the display,
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold the eject button for three
seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator.
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
background noise. Dolby Noise Reduction is
manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Auto CrO2 allows the cassette tape player to adjust to
the type of cassette tape for clearer sound for CrO2
cassette tapes.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on
and the underlined compact disc symbol appears on the
display, the disc will begin playing. Compact discs may
be loaded with the radio off but they will not start
playing until the radio is on. If you want to insert a disc
when the ignition is off, first press the eject button.
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm
compact discs. Full-size compact discs and the smaller
compact discs are loaded in the same manner.
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play. If the disc comes out, it could
be that:
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
RW: Press and hold the left arrow to reverse the
compact disc. Release it to return to playing speed.
3-18
FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward to
another part of the compact disc. Release it to return to
playing speed.
TUNE SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has
two positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button
to seek to the next or previous selection on the compact
disc.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) and Digital Signal
Processing (DSP) (If Equipped)
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few
seconds. The compact disc will go to a selection, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn
off random play.
EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the CD player to remove a compact disc. The
radio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio off
and/or the ignition off.
Playing the Radio
PWR/VOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press the knob again to turn the system off. To
increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
3-19
HR or MN: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button.
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. Sources
include cassette and compact disc. The audio source
must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are
shown on the display. If a source is being used, it will be
underlined on the display. If none of the audio sources
are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the
display. Press this button again or press BAND to switch
back to the radio.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1, FM2
or weather.
TUNE SEEK: When this button is pressed it has two
positions. Press this button to the first position to
manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button
is held at the first position for a few seconds, the radio
will continue tuning until this button is released. Press
this button to the second position and release to seek to
the next higher or lower radio station.
SCAN: Press this button for less than two seconds to
scan radio stations. The radio will go to a station, stop
for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
3-20
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. The RDS PTY
mode must be off to use this mode. You can set up to
24 stations (six AM, six FM1, six FM2 and
six weather). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1, FM2 or weather.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
more than two seconds. Whenever you press that
numbered button for less than two seconds, the
station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets because the
radio remembers them.
PRESET SCAN: Press and hold SCAN for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each of
your preset stations for five seconds. The radio will go
to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
stop for five seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press SCAN again to stop scanning. If a preset
station has weak reception, the radio will not stop at the
preset station.
Using RDS Mode
Your audio system is equipped with Radio Data Systems
(RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new features.
When RDS is on, the radio can:
D seek only to stations with the types of programs you
want to listen to,
D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
D receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
D receive and display messages from radio stations and
D search for a stronger station when a station is too
weak for listening.
RDS features are only available for use on FM stations
which broadcast RDS information.
RDS SELECT: Press this button to use the
alternate RDS functions (RDS, TA, MSG, PTY and
PTY ) located on the six numbered pushbuttons.
RDS SELECT: will appear on the display. The alternate
RDS functions are only available when you are using
the FM band of your radio.
t u
RDS (1): With RDS off, press the RDS SELECT button,
followed by this button to turn RDS on. The RDS
display will turn on. You must have RDS on to use the
new RDS functions. The RDS display will also turn on
if one of the other RDS function buttons has been
pressed on. If you are tuned to a station broadcasting
RDS information, the station’s call letters and Program
Type (PTY) will replace the station’s frequency on the
display. After five seconds, the program type will be
replaced on the display by the station’s program type
name. The program type and program type name may be
the same or different. Press BAND to recall the
frequency and program type displays. If the radio is
tuned to a station that is not broadcasting RDS
information, the station’s frequency will remain on the
display. While RDS is on, the radio will search for a
stronger station in the network when a station gets too
weak for listening. Press the RDS SELECT button,
followed by this button again to turn RDS off. All RDS
functions will be turned off.
3-21
REGION: You can also use the RDS button to access
the region function. When an RDS station becomes
weak, this function searches for a stronger station within
the same network. A network can span a great distance.
One network can have stations spread across a country
or continent. Each network breaks down into regions.
With regions, local news items like weather and traffic
are available to you. When the region function is on, the
radio only searches for stations in the same network and
region. You can only use the region function when RDS
is already on. Press the RDS SELECT button. Then
press and hold the RDS button for two seconds.
REGION: ON will appear on the display. While
REGION: ON appears on the display, press the RDS
button again to turn the region function off. REGION:
OFF will appear on the display. The region function can
be turned on again by pressing the RDS button.
TA (2): Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by
this button to receive traffic announcements. The radio
will turn on the TA display. TP will appear on the
display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements. You may also receive traffic
announcements from stations in the network related to
the tuned station. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
station which does. When the radio finds a station which
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. If no
3-22
station is found, NONE FOUND will appear on the
display and the TA icon will turn off. When SEEK or
SCAN is pressed with the traffic announcement function
on, the radio will only stop at stations which broadcast
traffic announcements.
While a traffic announcement plays, the radio uses a
special type of volume called TA volume. To increase
TA volume, turn the PWR/VOL knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. TA
VOLUME will appear on the display while the volume
is being adjusted.
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station or a related network station, you will hear it,
even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or
compact disc is playing. If the radio tunes to a related
network station for a traffic announcement, it will return
to the original station when the announcement is
finished. If the cassette tape or compact disc player was
being used, the tape or compact disc will stay in the
player and resume play at the point where it stopped.
Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by this button
again to turn TA off.
MSG (3): When RDS is on, if the current station has a
message, MSG will appear on the display. Press the
RDS SELECT button, followed by this button to see the
message. If the whole message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every three
seconds until the message is completed. To see the parts
of the message faster than every three seconds, press this
button again. A new group of words will appear on the
display. Once the complete message has been displayed,
MSG will disappear from the display until another new
MSG is received.
PTY (4): This button is used to turn on and off Program
Type (PTY) seeks and scans. Press the RDS SELECT
button, followed by this button. The PTY display will
turn on. RDS SELECT: PTY NEWS will appear on the
display for three seconds. (The PTY shown will be the
last PTY selected.) Press the RDS SELECT button,
followed by this button again to turn the PTY
display off.
t u
t u
PTY (5) (6): With RDS on, press the RDS
SELECT button, followed by
or . The PTY
display will turn on, if it is not already on. RDS
SELECT: PTY NEWS will appear on the display for
three seconds. (The PTY shown will be the last PTY
selected.) While this message is displayed, use
and
to move up and down the PTY list. If you pause on a
PTY for three seconds, PRESET PTY: NEWS will
appear on the display. While this message is displayed,
you can save the PTY in a preset by pressing one of the
six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Allow
three seconds for the message to disappear if you do not
want to save the PTY in a preset. See “Radio Data
Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections” in
the Index.
u
t
When the PTY display is on, press SEEK and SCAN to
find radio stations of the PTY you want to listen to. The
last PTY selected will be used for seek and scan modes.
If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE
FOUND will appear on the display. If both PTY and TA
are on, the radio will search for stations with traffic
announcements and the selected PTY.
3-23
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite Program Types (PTYs).
These buttons have factory PTY presets. See “Radio
Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections”
in the Index. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and
six FM2). Just:
1. Turn PTY on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in an RDS station with the PTY you desire.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button for less
than two seconds, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your RDS presets because the
radio remembers them.
HR or MN: Press the RDS SELECT button, followed
by one of these buttons to display the time for the
current station. STATION TIME IS will be displayed.
If a time has not been sent to the radio, NO STATION
TIME will be displayed. If you have recently tuned to
the station, you may need to wait a minute before the
time is available to the radio. To set the clock to the
3-24
current displayed station time, press and hold HR
or MN until TIME UPDATED is displayed. There is a
two second delay before the time is updated. RDS mode
does not have to be on to use this function, but you must
be tuned to an FM RDS station.
ALERT: This type of announcement warns of national
or local emergencies. You will not be able to turn off
alert announcements. Alert announcements will come on
even if RDS mode is turned off. ALERT appears on the
display when an alert announcement plays. The radio
uses TA volume during these announcements. To
increase volume, turn the PWR/VOL knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. TA
VOLUME will appear on the display while the volume
is being adjusted. When an alert announcement comes
on the tuned radio station or a related network station,
you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a
cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the radio
tunes to a related network station for an alert
announcement, it will return to the original station when
the announcement is finished. If the cassette tape or
compact disc player is playing, play will stop for the
announcement and resume when the announcement
is finished.
Setting the Tone
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
tone control (BASS or TREBLE) is found. The radio
keeps separate tone settings for each band, preset
(except weather band presets) and source.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control, press
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select
the desired level.
To save the tone settings for your presets, press and hold
the numbered button for the desired preset for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep.
Using DSP Mode
DSP: The Digital Signal Processing (DSP) feature is
used to provide a choice of four different listening
experiences: TALK, FRONT SEAT, AMBIENCE and
SPACIOUS. DSP can be used while listening to the
radio, the cassette tape player or the CD player. Press
this button to turn DSP on. Press and release this button
until you reach the desired selection. To turn DSP off,
press and hold this button until DSP OFF appears on the
display. When DSP OFF is displayed, the system will
provide the best overall audio performance. The radio
keeps separate DSP settings for each band (except
weather band, which is always set to TALK), preset
and source.
D TALK: This setting is used when listening to
non-musical material such as news, talk shows,
sports broadcasts and books on tape. TALK makes
spoken words sound very clear.
D FRONT SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to
give the driver the best possible sound qualities.
FRONT SEAT can be used at any time for any
material. Rear seat passengers in the vehicle may not
get the same effect.
D AMBIENCE: This setting is used to enhance the
stereo effect.
D SPACIOUS: This setting is used to make the
listening space seem larger.
Adjusting the Speakers
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
BALANCE or FADE control is found.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or
FADE control, press the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on
this button to select the desired level.
3-25
Playing a Cassette Tape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will
begin playing as soon as it is inserted. When one side of
your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays the
other side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing
until the radio is on. If you want to insert a cassette tape
when the ignition is off, first press the eject button.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, TONE, LEVEL
and DSP controls just as you do for the radio. Other
controls may have different functions when a tape is
inserted. The display will show an underlined tape
symbol. TAPE PLAY will appear on the display when a
tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side of
the tape is playing.
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it
could be that:
D The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down and try turning the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Flip the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
cassette tape may be damaged and should not be
used in the player. Try a new tape to be sure your
player is working properly.
3-26
D The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if your
tape is broken. Try a new tape.)
RW: Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The
radio will play while the tape rewinds. You may use
your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station
while in RW mode. Press the left arrow again to return
to playing speed.
FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another part
of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances.
You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another
radio station while in FF mode. Press the right arrow
again to return to playing speed.
TUNE SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button
to seek to the next or previous selection on the tape.
Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for TUNE SEEK to work. The
sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few
seconds. The tape will go to a selection, stop for a few
seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to change the side of the tape
that is playing.
EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the cassette tape player to remove a tape. The
radio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio off
and/or the ignition off.
CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears on the display,
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you
clean the player, press and hold the eject button for
three seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator. The
radio will display CLEAN TAPE MSG CLEARED to
show that the indicator was reset.
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
background noise. Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured
under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Auto CrO2 allows the cassette tape player to adjust to
the type of cassette tape for clearer sound for CrO2
cassette tapes.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on
and the underlined compact disc symbol appears on the
display, the disc will begin playing. Compact discs may
be loaded with the radio off but they will not start
playing until the radio is on. If you want to insert a disc
when the ignition is off, first press the eject button.
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm
compact discs. Full-size compact discs and the smaller
compact discs are loaded in the same manner.
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play. If the disc comes out, it could
be that:
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
3-27
RW: Press and hold the left arrow to reverse the
compact disc. Release it to return to playing speed.
FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward to
another part of the compact disc. Release it to return to
playing speed.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
MiniDisc Player with Radio Data Systems
(RDS) and Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
(If Equipped)
TUNE SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has
two positions. This button works the same, whether it
is pressed to the first or second position. Press this
button to seek to the next or previous selection on the
compact disc.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a
few seconds. The compact disc will go to a selection,
stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection.
Press this button again to stop scanning.
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn
off random play.
EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the compact disc player to remove a compact
disc. The radio will play. Eject may be activated with the
radio off and/or the ignition off.
3-28
Playing the Radio
PWR/VOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press the knob again to turn the system off. To
increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
AVC: Your system has a feature called Automatic
Volume Control (AVC). With AVC, your audio
system monitors the noise in the vehicle. Then, AVC
automatically adjusts the volume level so that it always
sounds the same to you. To use AVC, press and hold the
TONE button until AUTO VOLUME CONTROL OFF
appears on the display. Then press the LEVEL plus (+)
symbol. AUTO VOLUME CONTROL ON will appear
on the display. AVC VOLUME will appear on the
display any time you adjust the volume while AVC is
on. To turn AVC off, press and hold the TONE button
until AUTO VOLUME CONTROL ON appears on the
display. Then press the LEVEL minus (-) symbol.
AUTO VOLUME CONTROL OFF will appear on
the display.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1, FM2
or weather.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has two
positions. Press this button to the first position to
manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button
is held at the first position for a few seconds, the radio
will continue tuning until this button is released. Press
this button to the second position and release to seek to
the next higher or lower radio station.
SCAN: Press this button for less than two seconds to
scan radio stations. The radio will go to a station, stop
for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
HR or MN: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button.
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. Sources
include cassette and MiniDisc. The audio source must
be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are shown
on the display. If a source is being used, it will be
underlined on the display. If none of the audio sources
are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the
display. Press this button again or press BAND to switch
back to the radio.
3-29
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. The RDS PTY
mode must be off to use this mode. You can set up to
24 stations (six AM, six FM1, six FM2 and
six weather). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1, FM2 or weather.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button for less
than two seconds, the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets because the
radio remembers them.
PRESET SCAN: Press and hold SCAN for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each of
your preset stations for five seconds. The radio will go
to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
stop for five seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press SCAN again to stop scanning. If a preset
station has weak reception, the radio will not stop at the
preset station.
3-30
Using RDS Mode
Your audio system is equipped with Radio Data Systems
(RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new features.
When RDS is on, the radio can:
D seek only to stations with the types of programs you
want to listen to,
D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
D receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
D receive and display messages from radio stations and
D search for a stronger station when a station is too
weak for listening.
RDS features are only available for use on FM stations
which broadcast RDS information.
RDS SELECT: Press this button to use the
alternate RDS functions (RDS, TA, MSG, PTY and
PTY ) located on the six numbered pushbuttons.
RDS SELECT will appear on the display. The alternate
RDS functions are only available when you are using
the FM band of your radio.
t u
RDS (1): With RDS off, press the RDS SELECT button,
followed by this button to turn RDS on. The RDS
display will turn on. You must have RDS on to use the
new RDS functions. The RDS display will also turn on
if one of the other RDS function buttons has been
pressed on. If you are tuned to a station broadcasting
RDS information, the station’s call letters and Program
Type (PTY) will replace the station’s frequency on the
display. After five seconds, the program type will be
replaced on the display by the station’s program type
name. The program type and program type name may be
the same or different. Press BAND to recall the
frequency and program type displays. If the radio is
tuned to a station that is not broadcasting RDS
information, the station’s frequency will remain on the
display. While RDS is on, the radio will search for a
stronger station in the network when a station gets too
weak for listening. Press the RDS SELECT button,
followed by this button again to turn RDS off. All RDS
functions will be turned off.
REGION: You can also use the RDS button to access
the region function. When an RDS station becomes
weak, this function searches for a stronger station within
the same network. A network can span a great distance.
One network can have stations spread across a country
or continent. Each network breaks down into regions.
With regions, local news items like weather and traffic
are available to you. When the region function is on, the
radio only searches for stations in the same network and
region. You can only use the region function when RDS
is already on. Press the RDS SELECT button. Then
press and hold the RDS button for two seconds.
REGION: ON will appear on the display. While
REGION: ON appears on the display, press the RDS
button again to turn the region function off. REGION:
OFF will appear on the display. The region function can
be turned on again by pressing the RDS button.
3-31
TA (2): Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by
this button to receive traffic announcements. The radio
will turn on the TA display. TP will appear on the
display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements. You may also receive traffic
announcements from stations in the network related to
the tuned station. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
station which does. When the radio finds a station which
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. If no
station is found, NONE FOUND will appear on the
display. When SEEK or SCAN is pressed with the
traffic announcement function on, the radio will only
stop at stations which broadcast traffic announcements.
While a traffic announcement plays, the radio uses a
special type of volume called TA volume. To increase
TA volume, turn the PWR/VOL knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
TA VOLUME will appear on the display while the
volume is being adjusted.
3-32
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station or a related network station, you will hear it,
even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or
MiniDisc is playing. If the radio tunes to a related
network station for a traffic announcement, it will return
to the original station when the announcement is
finished. If the cassette tape or MiniDisc player was
being used, the tape or MiniDisc will stay in the player
and resume play at the point where it stopped.
Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by this button
again to turn TA off.
MSG (3): When RDS is on, if the current station has a
message, MSG will appear on the display. Press the
RDS SELECT button, followed by this button to see the
message. If the whole message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every three
seconds until the message is completed. To see the parts
of the message faster than every three seconds, press this
button again. A new group of words will appear on the
display. Once the complete message has been displayed,
MSG will disappear from the display until another new
MSG is received.
PTY (4): This button is used to turn on and off Program
Type (PTY) seeks and scans. Press the RDS SELECT
button, followed by this button. The PTY display will
turn on. RDS SELECT: PTY NEWS will appear on the
display for three seconds. (The PTY shown will be the
last PTY selected.) Press the RDS SELECT button,
followed by this button again to turn the PTY
display off.
tPTYu (5) (6): With RDS on, press the RDS
SELECT button, followed by t or u. The PTY
display will turn on, if it is not already on. RDS
SELECT: PTY NEWS will appear on the display for
three seconds. (The PTY shown will be the last PTY
selected.) While this message is displayed, use
and
to move up and down the PTY list. If you pause on
a PTY for three seconds, PRESET PTY: NEWS will
appear on the display. While this message is displayed,
you can save the PTY in a preset by pressing one of the
six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Allow
three seconds for the message to disappear if you do not
want to save the PTY in a preset. See “Radio Data
Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections” in
the Index.
u
t
When the PTY display is on, press SEEK and SCAN to
find radio stations of the PTY you want to listen to. The
last PTY selected will be used for seek and scan modes.
If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE
FOUND will appear on the display. If both PTY and TA
are on, the radio will search for stations with traffic
announcements and the selected PTY.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite Program Types (PTYs).
These buttons have factory PTY presets. See “Radio
Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections”
in the Index. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and
six FM2). Just:
1. Turn PTY on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in an RDS station with the PTY you desire.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button for less
than two seconds, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your RDS presets because the
radio remembers them.
3-33
HR or MN: Press the RDS SELECT button, followed
by one of these buttons to display the time for the
current station. STATION TIME IS will be displayed. If
a time has not been sent to the radio, NO STATION
TIME will be displayed. If you have recently tuned to
the station, you may need to wait a minute before the
time is available to the radio. To set the clock to the
current displayed station time, press and hold HR or MN
until TIME UPDATED is displayed. There is a two
second delay before the time is updated. RDS mode
does not have to be on to use this function, but you must
be tuned to an FM RDS station.
ALERT: This type of announcement warns of national
or local emergencies. You will not be able to turn off
alert announcements. Alert announcements will come on
even if RDS mode is turned off. ALERT appears on the
display when an alert announcement plays. The radio
uses TA volume during these announcements. To
increase volume, turn the PWR/VOL knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. TA
VOLUME will appear on the display while the volume
is being adjusted. When an alert announcement comes
3-34
on the tuned radio station or a related network station,
you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a
cassette tape or MiniDisc is playing. If the radio tunes
to a related network station for an alert announcement,
it will return to the original station when the
announcement is finished. If the cassette tape or
MiniDisc player is playing, play will stop for the
announcement and resume when the announcement is
finished.
Setting the Tone
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
tone control (BASS, TREBLE or MIDRANGE) is
found. The radio keeps separate tone settings for each
band, preset (except weather band presets) and source.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control, press
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select
the desired level.
To save the tone settings for your presets, press and hold
the numbered button for the desired preset for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep.
Using DSP Mode
DSP: The Digital Signal Processing (DSP) feature is used
to provide a choice of four different listening experiences:
TALK, FRONT SEAT, AMBIENCE and SPACIOUS.
DSP can be used while listening to the radio, the cassette
tape player or the MiniDisc player. Press this button to
turn DSP on. Press and release this button until you reach
the desired selection. To turn DSP off, press and hold this
button until DSP OFF appears on the display. When DSP
OFF is displayed, the system will provide the best overall
Bose performance. The radio keeps separate DSP settings
for each band (except weather band, which is always set to
TALK), preset and source.
D TALK: This setting is used when listening to
non-musical material such as news, talk shows,
sports broadcasts and books on tape. TALK makes
spoken words sound very clear.
D FRONT SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to
give the front seat occupants the best possible sound
qualities. FRONT SEAT can be used at any time for
any material. Rear seat passengers in the vehicle may
not get the same effect.
D AMBIENCE: This setting is used to enhance the
stereo effect.
D SPACIOUS: This setting is used to make the
listening space seem larger.
Adjusting the Speakers
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
BALANCE or FADE control is found.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or
FADE control, press the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on
this button to select the desired level.
Playing a Cassette Tape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will
begin playing as soon as it is inserted. When one side of
your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays the
other side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing
until the radio is on. If you want to insert a cassette tape
when the ignition is off, first press the eject button.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, TONE, LEVEL
and DSP controls just as you do for the radio. Other
controls may have different functions when a tape is
inserted. The display will show an underlined tape
symbol. TAPE PLAY will appear on the display when a
tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side of
the tape is playing.
3-35
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it
could be that:
D The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down and try turning the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Flip the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
cassette tape may be damaged and should not be
used in the player. Try a new tape to be sure your
player is working properly.
D The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if your
tape is broken. Try a new tape.)
RW: Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The
radio will play while the tape rewinds. You may use
your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station
while in RW mode. Press the left arrow again to return
to playing speed.
FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another part
of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances.
You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another
radio station while in FF mode. Press the right arrow
again to return to playing speed.
3-36
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button
to seek to the next or previous selection on the tape.
Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for TUNE-SEEK to work. The
sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few
seconds. The tape will go to a selection, stop for a few
seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to change the side of the tape
that is playing.
EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the cassette tape player to remove a tape. The
radio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio off
and/or the ignition off.
CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears on the display,
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold the eject button for three
seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator. The radio
will display CLEAN TAPE MSG CLEARED to show
that the indicator was reset.
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
background noise. Dolby Noise Reduction
is manufactured under a license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and
the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play. If the disc comes out, it could
be that:
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
Auto CrO2 allows the cassette tape player to adjust to
the type of cassette tape for clearer sound for CrO2
cassette tapes.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
Playing a MiniDisc
RW: Press and hold the left arrow to reverse the
MiniDisc. Release it to return to playing speed.
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on
and the underlined MiniDisc symbol appears on the
display, the disc will begin playing. MiniDiscs may be
loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing
until the radio is on. If you want to insert a disc when
the ignition is off, first press the eject button.
While a MiniDisc is playing, MD TRACK number will
appear on the display followed by ALBUM title, then
TRACK title. The display then reverts back to showing
MD TRACK number.
FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward to
another part of the MiniDisc. Release it to return to
playing speed.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this
button to seek to the next or previous selection on
the MiniDisc.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a
few seconds. The MiniDisc will go to a selection, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
3-37
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn
off random play.
EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the MiniDisc player to remove a MiniDisc. The
radio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio off
and/or the ignition off.
Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type
(PTY) Selections
PTY List
Description
Adlt Hit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adult Hits
Any . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Any
Classicl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classical
Cls Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classical Rock
College . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . College
Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Country
Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information
Jazz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jazz
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language
News . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . News
Nostalga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nostalgia
Oldies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oldies
Persnlty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personality
3-38
PTY List
Description
Public . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Public
R & B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rhythm and Blues
Rel Musc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Religious Music
Rel Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Religious Talk
Rock M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rock Music
Soft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft
Soft Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Rock
Sports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sports
Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Talk
Top 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top 40
Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather
Factory PTY Presets
Preset
FM1
FM2
Preset 1
Adult Hits
Jazz
Preset 2
Classical
Oldies
Preset 3
News
Religious Music
Preset 4
Public
Soft Rock
Preset 5
Rock
R&B
Preset 6
Country
Top 40
Navigation/Radio System (Option)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an AM-FM stereo
navigation radio system that includes digital sound
processing (DSP), a Radio Data System (RDS) with
program “type” selections (PTY) that will seek
out the kind of music you want to listen to. The radio
system can also communicate with your navigation
system to broadcast announcements on traffic,
weather and emergency alert communications. For
information on how to use this system, see
“Navigation/Radio System” supplement.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
Navigation/Radio Display and Controls
The display screen is located in the center of the
instrument panel. There are eight “hard” buttons and a
touch sensitive screen.
1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the SOURCE button for two seconds.
The tape symbol on the display will flash three
times, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter.
This override routine will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
3-39
Glovebox-Mounted CD Changer
With the compact disc changer, you can play up to 6
discs continuously. Normal size discs may be played
using the trays supplied in the magazine. The smaller
discs (8 cm) can be played only with specially
designed trays.
You must first load the magazine with discs before you
can play a compact disc. Each of the 6 trays holds one
disc. Load the trays from bottom to top, placing a disc in
the tray label side up. If you load a disc label side down,
the disc will not play and an error will occur. Repeat this
procedure for loading up to 6 discs in the magazine.
Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide
open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push
the magazine into the changer in the direction of the
arrow marked on top of the magazine.
3-40
radio display. If the CD changer is checking the
magazine for CDs, the CD symbol will flash on the
display until the changer is ready to play. When a
CD begins playing, a disc and track number will be
displayed. The disc numbers are listed on the front of
the magazine.
All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio
buttons, except for ejecting the CD magazine.
PUSHBUTTONS: Press buttons one through six to go
from one compact disc to another that is loaded in the
changer. These pushbuttons represent the order of the
discs loaded in the changer.
Close the door by sliding it all the way to the right.
When the door is closed, the changer will begin
checking for discs in the magazine. This will continue
for up to one and a half minutes, depending on the
number of discs loaded.
To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD
changer door all the way open. Press the EJECT button
and the magazine will eject. Remember to keep the door
closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from
getting inside the changer.
Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the
changer, the CD changer symbol will appear on the
RW: Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection.
FF: Press and hold this button to advance quickly
through a track selection.
TUNE-SEEK: Press the upward arrow to the first
detent to seek to the next selection on the compact disc.
If playing last track of disc, pressing the upward arrow
will seek to the first track of disc. Press the downward
arrow to the first detent to seek to the previous selection
on the compact disc. If playing the first track of disc,
pressing the downward arrow will seek to the last track
of disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-41
SCAN: Press this button. You will hear the first few
seconds of the first track on each disc. Press this button
again to stop scanning. The CD will mute while
scanning and SCAN will appear on the display.
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RDM will appear on the
display. Press TUNE-SEEK while RDM is on the
display to randomly seek through discs. Press RDM
again to turn off random play. This feature may not be
available on your radio.
SIDE: Press this button to select the next disc in the
changer. Each time you press this button, LOADING
will appear on the display and the disc number on the
radio display will go to that of the next available CD.
SOURCE: Press this button if you have a disc loaded in
the changer and the radio is on, to play a compact disc.
To return to playing the radio, press BAND. Pressing
source also switches between a tape or compact disc
(or mini disc) if both are loaded (if equipped).
EJECT: Slide the CD changer door all the way open.
Press the EJECT button and the magazine will eject.
3-42
Compact Disc Changer Errors
CD CHANGER ERROR could be displayed for
the following:
D The road is too rough. The disc should play when the
road is smoother.
D The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or loaded label
side up.
D The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide this
information to your dealer when reporting the problem.
Radio Personalization with Home and Away
Feature (If Equipped)
If DRIVER 1 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS or
DRIVER 2 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS appears in the
display when the radio is first turned on, your vehicle is
equipped with this feature.
With this feature, your vehicle will recall the latest radio
settings as adjusted the last time your vehicle was
operated. This feature allows two different drivers to
store and recall their own radio settings. The settings
recalled by the radio are determined by which RKE
transmitter (“1” or “2”) was used to enter the vehicle.
The number on the back of the RKE transmitter
corresponds to driver 1 or to driver 2. The radio settings
will automatically adjust to where they were last set
by the identified driver. The settings can also be recalled
by briefly pressing the MEMORY seat buttons 1 or
2 located on the driver’s door.
Your radio can store home and away presets. Home and
away presets allow you to use one set of preset radio
settings in the area where you live, and another set when
you go out of town. That way, you will not need to
reprogram your presets every time you travel. With the
radio off and the clock displayed, use FF and RW to
select home or away presets. To select the away presets,
press and hold FF for five counts until you hear a beep.
The next time the radio comes on, the away presets will
be active. To select the home presets, press and hold RW
for five counts until you hear a beep. The next time the
radio comes on, the home presets will be active.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your home radio presets because
the radio remembers them. However, you will have to
reset your away radio presets.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. Your vehicle has a “built-in” theft-deterrent
feature on each radio that is automatic -- there is no
programming required. The radio in your vehicle cannot
be used in any other vehicle. When the radio was
originally installed in your vehicle at the factory, it
stored the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Each
time the ignition is turned on, the VIN is verified. If the
vehicle’s VIN does not match the VIN stored in the
radio, THEFTLOCK will be activated and the audio
system will not play. If the radio is removed from your
vehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be used to
trace the radio back to your vehicle.
3-43
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Some audio controls can be
adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include
the following:
VOLUME: Press the up arrow lever to increase volume
and the down arrow lever to decrease volume.
3-44
SELECT: When listening to the radio, press the up or
down arrow lever to tune to the next or previous preset
radio station. (If your vehicle is equipped with the
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player, factory
presets which have not been reprogrammed with your
stations will be ignored). When listening to a cassette
tape, the up or down arrow lever can be used to SEEK
forward and rearward through the tape. Pressing the up
or down arrow lever when listening to a CD will cause
the player to go to the next or previous selection. When
in Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY)
mode, the up or down arrow lever can be used to
perform a PTY preset seek. PSEEK will appear on the
display while the PTY preset seek is performed. The
radio will seek all of the PTYs stored in presets, except
for the PTY Any.
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
AM
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
Weather Band (If Equipped)
Weather band is restricted to speech and the audio
quality is not as good as with the AM or FM bands.
Depending on location, the radio should receive one or
two channels.
3-45
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, radio or other systems, and
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
also interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN or
CLEAN TAPE to indicate that you have used your tape
player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean
timer. If this message appears on the display, your
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a
reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to
see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this other
cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the
tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
3-46
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To
prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the
following steps.
1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the SOURCE button for two seconds.
The tape symbol on the display will flash three times.
4. Turn the radio on and insert the scrubbing action
cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player, press and hold the eject button for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator after you clean
the player. The radio will display --- to show the
indicator was reset.
If your vehicle is equipped with any other radio, press
and hold the eject button for three seconds to reset the
CLEAN TAPE indicator after you clean the player. The
radio will display CLEAN TAPE MSG CLEARED to
show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
3-47
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Diversity Antenna System
Your AM-FM antennas are located in the front
windshield and rear window. Be sure that the inside
surfaces of the front windshield and rear window are
not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not
damaged. If the inside surfaces are damaged, they could
interfere with radio reception.
3-48
NOTICE:
Do not try to clear frost or other material from
the inside of the rear window with a razor blade
or anything else that is sharp. This may damage
the rear defogger grid and affect your radio’s
ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
If, when you turn on your rear window defogger, you
hear static on your radio station, it could mean that a
defogger grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the
grid line must be repaired.
If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone to
your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for
the AM-FM antennas or place the cellular telephone
antenna over the grid lines.
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-11
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-17
4-19
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-26
4-28
4-32
4-33
4-35
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
4-
4-1
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
4-2
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the
floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull
off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”
if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many
might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
D The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even
fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
CAUTION:
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you may even notice that your brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
4-7
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet. You’re
driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster
than any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road conditions.
4-8
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear the
anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the brake
pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control
system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to
safely use it again, you may reengage the cruise control. (See
“Cruise Control” in the Index.)
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel
spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions.
The system operates only if it senses that one or both of
the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction.
When this happens, the system works the front brakes and
reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
The TRACTION ENGAGED message will display on
the Driver Information Center when the traction control
system is limiting wheel spin. See “Driver Information
Center Messages” in the Index. You may feel or hear the
system working, but this is normal.
United States
Canada
This warning light will come on to let you know if
there’s a problem with your traction control system.
See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
4-9
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
leave the system on. But you can turn the traction control
system off if you ever need to. (You should turn the
system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.)
To turn the system off, press
the button located on the
center console. (For
vehicles with a column
shifter, the button is located
at the end of the shift lever.)
4-10
The TRACTION OFF message will display on the
Driver Information Center. If the system is limiting
wheel spin when you press the button, the TRACTION
OFF message will display -- but the system won’t turn
off right away. It will wait until there’s no longer a
current need to limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing
the button again. The TRACTION READY message
should display briefly on the Driver Information Center.
The traction control system monitors the front brake
rotor temperature. If the traction control system comes
on while the front brake rotors are hot due to heavy use
of braking or previous traction control, the TRACTION
SUSPENDED message will be displayed -- but the
system won’t turn off right away. It will wait until
there’s no longer a current need to limit wheel spin. The
TRACTION READY message should appear when the
brake rotors are no longer hot and the traction control
system will resume normal operation.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
MagnasteerR
This system continuously adjusts the effort you feel
when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease
when parking yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed.
While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. Refer to “Traction Control
System” in the Index.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
If you have StabilitrakR, you may see the STABILITY
SYS ENGAGED message on the Driver Information
Center. See “Stability Sys Engaged Message” in
the Index.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
4-11
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
If you have StabilitrakR, to help you steer in the
direction you want to go, during certain sharp or sudden
cornering maneuvers, gear selection is controlled. This
will maximize the available drive wheel torque and
minimize the transaxle response time and shift activity.
During this kind of maneuver, the transaxle shifts
automatically as vehicle speed changes.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
4-12
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
4-13
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
4-14
D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a
solid line on your side of the lane or a double
solid line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
4-15
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid.
If your traction control system is off, then an
acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
If you have StabilitrakR, you may see the STABILITY
SYS ENGAGED message on the Driver Information
Center. See “Stability Sys Engaged Message” in
the Index.
4-16
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems,
or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
4-17
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
4-18
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
4-19
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
4-20
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
4-21
Driving Through Flowing Water
CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. If
you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be
carried away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants could
drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs, and
otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
4-22
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
D Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
D Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start
to move, check both ways for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-23
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
4-24
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Cadillac dealerships all across North America. They’ll
be ready and willing to help if you need it.
4-25
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness,
or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
4-26
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
D Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and your vehicle in gear when
you go downhill.
D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool
your engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
D Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
4-27
D As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
D You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area
or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
Winter Driving
4-28
Here are some tips for winter driving:
D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
4-29
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Keep your traction control system on. It improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though your vehicle has a traction control system,
you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. See “Traction Control System” in
the Index.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
D Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-30
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
D Turn on your hazard flashers.
D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-31
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
4-32
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground will damage drivetrain components.
Loading Your Vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label
found on the driver’s side center hinge pillar tells you
the proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you
important information about the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can
carry. This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight
and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all
options not installed in the factory.
The other label is the Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front
or rear axle.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
Don’t carry more than 203 lbs. (92 kg) in the trunk.
4-33
CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages or anything else -- they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-34
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in
a crash.
D Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Electronic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the
load changes. It’s automatic -- you don’t need to
adjust anything.
Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well -- or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
You may also damage your vehicle; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice
and information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine is
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
4-35
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
D There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
D Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should always
use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more
than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer
about sway controls.
D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
D Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
4-36
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg)
without the optional trailer towing package. If you have
the optional trailer towing package, the maximum trailer
weight should never be more than 3,000 lbs. (1 350 kg).
These are total maximum weights including the load.
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
The optional trailer towing package provides the
necessary oil cooler to tow a trailer heavier than
2,000 lbs. (900 kg).
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 436004
Pontiac, MI 48343-6004
In Canada, write to:
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must
add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle
will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-37
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Hitches
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
D The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
D If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label at the rear edge
of the driver’s door or see “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the
GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the
trailer tongue.
4-38
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure to use a
properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and
sway control of the proper size. This equipment is
very important for proper vehicle loading and good
handling when you’re driving.
D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt
and water can, too.
Safety Chains
Trailer Brakes
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Because you have anti-lock brakes, don’t try to tap into
your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do, both
brake systems won’t work well, or at all. If you tow
more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg), use trailer brakes. Be sure
to follow the instructions that come with the trailer or
from the brake manufacturer.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to maintain them properly.
Trailer Wiring Harness (Option)
If your vehicle is equipped with the trailer towing
package, your vehicle has additional wiring to attach
to a trailer’s wiring harness. Contact your dealer for
proper installation.
4-39
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
4-40
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal
well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument panel
will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash,
telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes
or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
For some grade conditions, it may be better to drive in
THIRD (3) to lessen transaxle shifting. You may wish to
drive in THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) while towing
a trailer.
On a long uphill grade, reduce your speed to around
45 mph (70 km/h) or less to reduce the possibility of
engine and transaxle overheating.
4-41
Parking on Hills
CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P).
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then shift into
PARK (P) firmly and apply your parking brakes.
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-42
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
D Start your engine;
D Shift into a gear; and
D Be sure the parking brake has released.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule booklet
for more on this. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake
system. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
this information before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-8
5-9
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5-12
5-18
5-19
5-30
5-31
Cooling System
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning button
is located on the center
of the instrument panel
between the two air vents.
Press the button in to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off.
The light in the center of the
button will flash, indicating
that the hazard warning
flashers are on.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button again to turn your hazard warning
flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on,
the turn signals won’t work.
5-2
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If you cannot start your vehicle and you are unable to
remove your key from the ignition, see “Shift Lock
Release” in the Index.
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Please follow the steps below to do it safely.
CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all
of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
The ACDelcoR battery in your vehicle has a
built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump
start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear
or light yellow. Replace the battery when there
is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a
cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-3
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off all lamps
that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it
could save your radio!
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put an
automatic transaxle in PARK (P).
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the battery on the other
vehicle and the remote positive (+) terminal, located
on the passenger’s side of the engine, on your
vehicle. (You will not see the battery under the hood
of your vehicle, since it is located under the rear seat
on the passenger’s side.) Find the positive (+)
and negative (-) terminals on the battery in the
other vehicle.
You do not need to access your battery for jump
starting. The remote positive (+) terminal, located on
the driver’s side of the engine compartment, is for
this purpose.
5-4
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5. Lift and move the red
positive (+) terminal
cover away from the
relay center.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelcoR battery
installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5-5
6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could also be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part. Don’t connect
positive (+) to the negative (-) or you will get a short
that would damage the battery and maybe other
parts, too. Also, don’t connect the negative (-) cable
to negative (-) terminal on the dead battery because
this can cause sparks.
CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5-6
7. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
remote positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle.
8. Don’t let the other end
of the positive (+) cable
touch metal. Now,
connect the red +
terminal to the red
positive (+) terminal of
the other vehicle’s
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
9. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
10. Your vehicle has a remote negative terminal,
marked “GND”, located near the power steering
fluid reservoir. Attach the cable to the remote
negative terminal provided.
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
Don’t let the other end of the negative (-) cable touch
anything until the next step. The other end of the
negative (-) cable doesn’t go to the dead battery.
13. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal. Replace the red
positive (+) remote terminal cover to its
original position.
5-7
Towing Your Vehicle
CAUTION:
A. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
B. Good Battery
C. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
5-8
To help avoid serious personal injury to you
or others:
D Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
D Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
D Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
D Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
D Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chains when towing it.
D Use only the correct hooks.
NOTICE:
Use the proper towing equipment to avoid
damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas
of the vehicle.
With current trends in automotive styles and design, it is
essential that the correct towing equipment is used to
tow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with wheel lift
or car carrier equipment.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” in the Index.
Engine Overheating
You will find an ENGINE COOLANT HOT, IDLE
ENGINE message or an ENGINE OVERHEATED,
STOP ENGINE message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). You will also hear a chime. There is also
an engine temperature warning light and/or gage on the
instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light” or “Engine Coolant Temperature Gage”
in the Index.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Should an overheated engine condition exist and the
message ENGINE OVERHEATED, STOP ENGINE is
displayed, an overheat protection mode which alternates
firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency; you may
drive up to 50 miles (80 km). Towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
NOTICE:
After driving in the overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow
the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair
the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life indicator. See “Engine Oil” in
the Index.
5-9
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool. See “Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.
5-10
NOTICE:
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
D
D
D
D
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
2. Dial temperature control to the highest heat setting
and open the windows, as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously in
this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-11
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-12
A low coolant level should be indicated by a CHECK
COOLANT LEVEL message on the Driver Information
Center. If it is, you may have a leak in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use
only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use
of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
5-13
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to
see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If
they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the proper level (2.5 inches (6.4 cm) below the
base of the fill neck), add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOLR coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool
before you do it. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for
more information.)
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-14
CAUTION: (Continued)
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system
and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you
ever have to turn the pressure cap.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant.
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. So
use the recommended coolant.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-15
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) until it first stops. (Don’t
press down while turning the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-16
2. Then keep turning the cap, but now push down as
you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the base of the filler neck.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches about 2.5 inches (6.4 cm)
below the base of the filler neck.
5-17
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on
the pressure cap line up like this.
Start the engine and allow it to warm up. If the CHECK
COOLANT LEVEL message does not appear on the
Driver Information Center, coolant is at the proper fill
level. If a CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message does
appear, repeat Steps 1 to 3 and reinstall the pressure cap
or see your dealer.
5-18
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-19
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk.
Instructions for changing your tires are on the inside of
the tire cover located in your trunk.
To gain access to the instructions, spare tire and jacking
equipment, do the following:
1. Press the area at the
front of the handle
located on the cover, so
that the back edge
swings upward.
5-20
2. Grab the handle and
remove the cover.
3. Unscrew the wing nuts to remove the container that
holds the wrench and jack.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and the
wheel wrench (B).
4. Remove the wheel wrench, jack and spare tire from
the trunk. See “Compact Spare Tire” later in this
section for more information about the compact
spare tire.
5-21
Removing the Wheel Cover
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
Models with Center Wheel Cover
For models having aluminum wheels with a center
wheel cover, use the flat end of the wheel wrench to
gently pry the wheel covers off. Be careful not to scratch
the aluminum wheel edge and don’t try to remove it
with your hands.
For models having exposed wheel nuts, use the wheel
wrench to remove the wheel nut covers.
5-22
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
2. Find the jacking location from the diagrams above
and corresponding hoisting notches located in the
plastic molding. The notches may be labeled
“JACK” with an arrow pointing to the jacking
location on the vehicle.
5-23
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
3. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the
jack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle.
4. Raise the jack until the metal flange fits firmly into
the channel of the jack head.
5. Put the compact spare near you.
CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
7. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-24
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
9. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
5-25
10. Replace the wheel nuts
with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each
nut by hand until the
wheel is held against
the hub.
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-26
CAUTION:
12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
100 lb-ft (140 N·m).
If your vehicle is equipped with wheel nut covers,
screw them on with your fingers, then tighten
one-quarter turn with the wheel wrench.
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
5-27
13. Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover and
lug nut caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire
repaired or replaced.
NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare. If
you try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle,
you’ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk.
Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.
Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment in
the trunk. For storage, the jack must be raised until the
screw end is flush with the edge of the jack.
5-28
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. See “Compact Spare Tire” in the index. Check the
storage instructions label for information on how to
properly position and store the compact spare tire.
5-29
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi
(420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact
spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire
repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best
to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in
case you need it again.
NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using
them can damage your vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your
compact spare.
5-30
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
NOTICE:
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking”
can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transaxle back and
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. And,
the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. You should turn
your traction control system off. (See “Traction Control
System” in the Index.) Then shift back and forth
between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning
your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out,
see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
5-31
✍
5-32
NOTES
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-8
6-8
6-11
6-16
6-20
6-24
6-27
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-33
6-35
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
6-44
6-45
6-54
6-54
6-57
6-59
6-60
6-60
6-61
6-62
6-63
6-67
6-71
6-71
6-72
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels (If Equipped)
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
6-
6-1
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Maintenance
Schedule booklet.
6-2
CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Fuel
Use premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or
higher for best performance. You may use middle grade
or regular unleaded gasolines, but your vehicle’s
acceleration may be slightly reduced.
It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications
which have been developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and endorsed by the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association for
better vehicle performance and engine protection.
Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91
(at least 87 for regular). If the octane is less than 87, you
may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s
bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging
noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill.
That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher
octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant
knock that means you have a problem.
6-3
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. (See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to
your authorized Cadillac dealer for diagnosis to
determine the cause of failure. In the event it is
determined that the cause of the condition is the type of
fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with
the specifications described earlier.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not
the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not
recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your
emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument
panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized Cadillac dealer for service.
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
6-4
NOTICE:
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
The cap is located behind a hinged door on the driver’s
side of your vehicle.
6-5
The fuel door release button
is located to the left of the
steering wheel next to the
headlamp knob.
The button only works in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
when the ignition key is in any position and the VALET
lockout button is in the OFF position.
An alternate fuel door
release is located inside of
the trunk on the driver’s
side. Pull it to release the
fuel door.
6-6
While refueling, hang the cap by the tether from the
hook on the filler door.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-8
Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
Pull the lever inside the
vehicle to open the hood.
It is located on the lower
driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever which is located under the
front edge of the grille. Lift up on the release lever as
you raise the hood.
6-9
When you open the hood, you’ll see:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
Underhood Junction Block
Engine Coolant Surge Tank
Power Steering Fluid
Engine Oil Fill Cap
6-10
F.
G.
H.
I.
Engine Oil Dipstick
Brake Master Cylinder
Transaxle Dipstick/Fluid Fill Location
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
Underhood Lamp
Turn the parking lamps on to operate the underhood
lamp. The underhood lamp will come on when the hood
is opened.
Engine Oil
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the
instrument panel, it means you need to check your
engine oil level right away. For more information, see
“Checking Engine Oil” in the Index.
Analog Cluster, Digital Cluster similar
A CHECK OIL LEVEL message will appear when the
engine oil is approximately 1 quart (1L) low. If the
message is displayed, check the dipstick level and add
oil as needed.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
6-11
Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick is
located behind the radiator
on the driver’s side of the
engine. The handle says
ENGINE OIL on it.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
6-12
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
The oil fill cap is located
behind the radiator on the
passenger’s side of the
engine. Turn the cap
counterclockwise to
remove it.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so
much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
6-13
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any
oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has
the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. If
you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is American Petroleum Institute
certified for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for
your vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-14
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s going
to be 0 F (-18 C) or above. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
_
_
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20_F (-29_C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to
change your engine oil. This is not based on mileage,
but on engine revolutions and engine operating
temperature. When the computer has calculated that the
oil needs changing, the GM Oil Life System will
indicate that a change is necessary. The mileage between
oil and filter changes will vary depending on how you
drive your vehicle -- usually between 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) and 10,000 miles (16 000 km) since your
last oil and filter change. Under severe conditions, the
system may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
Never drive your vehicle more than 10,000 miles
(16 000 km) or 12 months (whichever occurs first)
without an oil change.
t
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you drive
in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner. Remember to
reset the Oil Life Indicator whenever the oil is changed.
6-15
How to Reset the Oil Life Indicator
After the oil has been changed, display the OIL LIFE
message by pressing the INFO button. Then press and
hold the RESET button until the display shows 100%
ENGINE OIL LIFE. This resets the oil life index. The
percentage of oil life remaining may be checked at any
time by pressing the INFO button several times until the
OIL LIFE message appears. For more information on
the oil life feature, see “Oil Life Indicator” in the Index.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner filter is located on the driver’s
side of the engine. Be sure the engine has cooled before
following these steps to replace the air cleaner filter:
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements
that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause
cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings
about the use and disposal of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
6-16
1. Loosen both wing nuts on the top of the air
cleaner assembly.
2. Lift up the outboard side of the air cleaner cover
at an angle while pulling toward you to remove
the cover.
Follow these steps to reinstall the air cleaner cover to the
air cleaner housing:
1. When installing the air cleaner cover, be sure to align
the two tabs located on the back of the air cleaner
cover with the two slots on the back of the air
cleaner housing.
2. Push slightly down and forward to slide the air
cleaner cover and housing back into place and close.
3. Reinstall and tighten the two wing nuts on the top of
the air cleaner assembly.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter.
3. Remove the air filter element and any loose debris
that may be found laying in the air cleaner base.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the
Maintenance Schedule booklet.
4. Replace the air filter element.
6-17
CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter Replacement
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the
pollen from the air entering your vehicle. Like your
vehicle’s air cleaner filter, it may need to be changed
periodically. For how often to change the passenger
compartment air filter, see your Maintenance
Schedule booklet.
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause
a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you’re driving.
The access panel for the passenger compartment air
filter is located under the hood near the windshield, on
the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
6-18
1. To access the passenger compartment air filter, insert
the flat tip of a screwdriver into the outer edge of the
cover and gently pry the cover up.
2. Then, insert the flat tip of the screwdriver behind the
push pin located on the inboard side of the air filter
compartment to carefully pry the pin out.
6-19
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
3. To remove the air filter, insert the flat tip of the
screwdriver between the air filter and the compartment
wall on the outboard side of the vehicle. Then, push in
to flatten the pin holding the air filter in place. Gently
remove the air filter and any loose debris that may be
inside the air filter compartment.
Insert the new air filter, by pushing until you hear a
click. Then, reinstall the push pin and snap the cover
into place.
6-20
D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
D Use such as limousine service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require change
until the message CHANGE TRANS FLUID appears on
the Driver Information Center.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the
Maintenance Schedule booklet.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading on
the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
D
D
D
D
When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180_F to 200_F
(82_C to 93_C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50_F
(10_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), you may have
to drive longer.
6-21
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
D Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
1. The transaxle fluid cap is located next to the radiator
hose and below the air cleaner assembly on the
driver’s side of the engine. Remove the air cleaner
assembly so you can reach the transaxle fluid cap.
Turn the transaxle fluid cap counterclockwise to
remove. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean
rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-22
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way. Reinstall the
air cleaner assembly.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRONR-III
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Maintenance
Schedule booklet.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
6-23
How to Reset Transaxle Fluid
Change Indicator
After the transaxle fluid has been changed, display the
transaxle FLUID LIFE message by pressing the INFO
button. Then press and hold the INFO RESET button
until the display shows “100”. This resets the transaxle
fluid life index. The percentage of transaxle fluid life
remaining may be checked at any time by pressing
the INFO button several times until the transaxle
FLUID LIFE message appears.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOLR extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
6-24
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant will:
D
D
D
D
D
Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C).
Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you
don’t need to add anything else.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-25
Checking Coolant
CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap -- even a
little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the full
cold mark, below the base of the fill neck. Use a
flashlight as necessary to see into the tank.
The surge tank is located on the passenger’s side of
the engine.
The cooling system is under a lot of pressure when it is
hot. If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message
appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you
will need to add coolant.
If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message comes on
and stays on, it means you’re low on engine coolant.
For more information, see “Check Coolant Level
Message” in the Index.
6-26
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
CAUTION:
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located between
the fuse block relay center
and the engine on the
passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is hand-tight.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
NOTICE:
The surge tank cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrow on the cap
lines up with the overflow hose.
6-27
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Adding Washer Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when
the fluid is low.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Maintenance Schedule booklet. Always use the proper
fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and
damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
6-28
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in front
of the fuse block relay center on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID. Add washer
fluid until the tank is full.
NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid,
D
D
D
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment. It is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid.
6-29
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work
at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
6-30
CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the
engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Maintenance Schedule booklet.
NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
D
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
6-31
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or
be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
6-32
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in the
Maintenance Schedule booklet under Part C “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake
parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelcoR battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an
ACDelco battery.
The battery is located under the rear seat cushion.
To access the battery, see “Removing the Rear Seat
Cushion” in the Index. You don’t need to access the
battery to jump start your vehicle. See “Jump Starting”
in the Index.
CAUTION:
A battery that isn’t properly vented can let
sulfuric acid fumes into the area under the rear
seat cushion. These fumes can damage your rear
seat safety belt systems. You may not be able to
see this damage, and the safety belts might not
provide the protection needed in a crash. If a
replacement battery is ever needed, it must be
vented in the same manner as the original
battery. Always make sure that the vent hose is
properly reattached before reinstalling the
seat cushion.
6-33
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more,
remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery.
This will help keep your battery from running down.
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached, the
vent hose connectors (B) must be securely reattached to
the vent outlets (C) on each side of the battery, and the
vent assembly grommet (D) must be secured to the
floor pan (E).
6-34
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulb, see
“Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer’s service department.
Headlamps
1. To access the
headlamps, remove all
of the push-pins that
hold the filler panel
cover in place.
Halogen Bulbs
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Do this by pressing the center of each pin down, then
remove the pin by pulling up on the outer circle. Then
set the cover aside.
6-35
2. Remove the two bolts at the top of the
headlamp assembly.
3. Loosen the bolt at the bottom of the headlamp
assembly to gain access to the bulb socket.
6-36
4. Firmly grasp the outboard side of the headlamp
assembly with both hands and pull hard enough, so
that the whole assembly opens freely.
5. Remove the bulb socket
dust cover and set aside.
6. Turn the headlamp
housing socket
counterclockwise to
unlock the socket from
the lamp housing.
7. Disconnect the bulb
from the socket by
pulling out the bulb.
8. Install the new bulb into the socket. Make sure that
the bulb is locked firmly into the bulb socket.
9. Reinstall the headlamp housing socket back into the
headlamp assembly.
10. To reinstall the headlamp assembly, see steps 2
through 5 in reverse.
6-37
To reinstall the filler panel:
Headlamp Aiming
1. Place the filler panel in the correct location.
2. Reset each push-pin by holding each by the outer
circle while pushing up on the pin assembly from
below. The center portion of the push-pin should
now be above the outer circle.
3. After placing each push-pin into the opening, press
down on the outer circle until it is seated against the
surface of the filler panel.
4. Lock each push-pin in place by pressing the center
of each down until they are level with the outer
circles. Use care not to press down so far that the
push-pin releases again.
6-38
Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system equipped with horizontal aim indicators. The
aim has been pre-set at the factory and should need
no further adjustment. This is true even though your
horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on
the “0” (zero) marks on their scales.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam
may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers
(for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash their
high beams at you (for vertical aim). If you believe your
headlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend that you
take your vehicle to your dealer for service. However, it
is possible for you to re-aim your headlamps as
described in the following procedure.
D The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall or
other flat surface.
D The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular to
the wall or other flat surface.
D The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.
D The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
NOTICE:
D Allow the headlamps to warm up for one to
To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before
beginning. Failure to follow these instructions
could cause damage to headlamp parts.
D Tires should be properly inflated.
D Start the vehicle to level the suspension.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
D The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps
are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other
flat surface.
two minutes before beginning.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle low beam
lamps. The high beam lamps will be correctly aimed if
the low beam lamps are aimed properly.
The headlamp aiming devices are under the hood near
the headlamps.
6-39
Headlamp Horizontal Aiming
Turn the horizontal aiming screw (A) until the
indicator (B) is lined up with zero.
If you believe your headlamps need horizontal
(left/right) adjustment, follow the horizontal aiming
procedure. If you believe your headlamps need only
vertical (up/down) adjustment, follow only the vertical
aiming procedure.
Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 TorxR
socket or T15 Torx screwdriver.
6-40
Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust the
vertical aim.
Headlamp Vertical Aiming
1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the lamps.
3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
floor to the recorded distance and draw a horizontal
line the width of the vehicle.
2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on each lamp; if left low beam, subtract two inches.
Record this distance.
6-41
4. Turn on the low beam headlamps and cover the lamp
not being evaluated. The ambient light should allow
the beam cut off to be seen on the wall.
6-42
5. Turn the vertical aiming screw (C) until the
headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal line. It is
recommended to cover the lamp that is not being
evaluated to better see the beam being aimed.
Front Cornering Lamps
Front Turn Signal Lamps
1. Follow Steps 1 through 5 in “Headlamps”
described previously.
1. The turn signal lamps are located beside the
headlamps. To access, lift off the bulb socket dust
cover. (See Step 1 under “Headlamps.”)
2. Disconnect the cornering lamp bulb by pulling the
bulb out of the socket. Do not twist or turn the bulb.
3. Replace cornering lamp bulb by pushing the bulb
directly into the socket.
4. Reinstall the cornering lamp housing socket back
into the headlamp assembly.
5. To reinstall headlamp assembly, see Steps 1 through
5 in reverse in “Headlamps”described previously.
2. Press the tab down and turn the housing socket
clockwise to unlock the socket from the
lamp housing.
6-43
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet under
Part B “Owner Checks and Services” for
more information.
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see “Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index
To replace the wiper blade assembly:
3. Remove the turn signal lamp housing socket and
replace the bulb.
6-44
1. Turn the ignition to ACC and turn the wipers on.
Position the wipers on the windshield in the “mid”
wipe position. Then with the door open, turn the
ignition to OFF.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Cadillac Warranty booklet for details.
CAUTION:
2. Tip the blade up almost to a “T” position and push
down on the tab to release the wiper blade assembly.
3. To install, align the wiper blade with the loop on
the wiper blade assembly, and push up to snap
into place.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-45
CAUTION: (Continued)
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
D Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured or broken by a sudden impact -such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires
at the recommended pressure.
D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
See “Inflation -- Tire Pressure” in this section
for inflation pressure adjustment for higher
speed driving.
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, which is located on
the rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
If you’ll be driving at high speeds (e.g., speeds of
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher), where it is legal, set the
cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation
pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or to 38 psi
(265 kPa), whichever is lower. See the example below.
When you end this high-speed driving, return to the
cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label.
Example:
You’ll find maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near the
rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs.) @ 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure
for high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
6-46
When to Check
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy.
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards.
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-47
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Maintenance Schedule
booklet for scheduled rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
6-48
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
(See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
D You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
D You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
6-49
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,
though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.
CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-50
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
Temperature -- A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a
half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
6-51
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
6-52
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
NOTICE: (Continued)
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P235/55R17 size tires, don’t
use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there’s not enough clearance.
NOTICE: (Continued)
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
If you have other tires, use tire chains only where
legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class
“S” type chains that are the proper size for your
tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
6-53
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
6-54
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean
normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Here are some cleaning tips:
D
D
D
D
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
entire area immediately or it will set.
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do it more than once.
D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
6-55
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Care of Safety Belts
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Cleaning Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood
immediately with a clean cloth.
Cleaning Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker won’t be damaged. Clean spots with just water
and mild soap.
CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or
a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
6-56
Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon AmiR Powder (non-scratching
glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse
it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone
grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During
very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be
required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Maintenance Schedule booklet.)
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
6-57
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or
that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
NOTICE:
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
6-58
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Tires
Cleaning Aluminum or
Chrome-Plated Wheels (If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the paint
finish and tires.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on any wheels other than chrome-plated wheels.
6-59
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Sheet Metal Damage
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control
can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed,
accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody
parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system even though they have corrosion protection.
6-60
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Cadillac
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427
SIZE
23 in. x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
32 oz. (0.946 L)
23 oz. (0.680 L)
1052918**
8 oz. (0.237 L)
DESCRIPTION
Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
t Protectant
Armor All
USAGE
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
and floor mats
Spray on and rinse with water
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
Shines vehicle without scratching
Spray on tire shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
t
Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner
1052929
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Wheel Cleaner
1052930
8 oz. (0.237 L)
Capture Dry Spot Remover
12345721
2.5 sq. ft.
Synthetic Chamois
12345725
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
12377964*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Finish Enhancer
12377966*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleaner Wax
12377984*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Surface Cleaner
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.
* For exterior use only.
** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.
1052925
16 oz. (0.473 L)
6-61
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the under side of the spare tire
cover in the trunk. It’s very helpful if you ever need to
order parts. On this label is:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
6-62
D
D
D
D
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Headlamp Wiring
Add-On Electrical Equipment
The headlamp wiring system has four individual fuses,
LF low, RF low, LF high and RF high. An electrical
overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. If this happens, have the
headlamp wiring checked right away.
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
A circuit breaker protects the wiper motor. If the wiper
motor overheats due to heavy snow, the wipers will stop
until the motor cools and will then restart.
A MiniFuseR powers the wiper motor. If the MiniFuse
blows, there is an electrical problem. Be sure to have
it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power
seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed or goes away.
6-63
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Underhood Junction Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused
by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating. If a MaxiFuse should blow, see your dealer
for service immediately.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a
spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that you
can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
The MaxiFuses are located in two Bussed Electrical
Centers (BEC), one located near the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side and the other under
the rear seat on the driver’s side. If a MaxiFuse should
blow, have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer immediately.
6-64
The front Bussed Electrical Center (BEC) is located
next to the engine on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located on
the top and the bottom of the fuse block cover.
Minifuses
Fuse
1
2
3
4
5
Usage
Assembly Line Diagnostic Link
Accessory
Windshield Wipers
Not Used
Headlamp Low Beam Left
Fuse
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Usage
Headlamp Low Beam Right
Instrument Panel
Powertrain Control Module Battery
Headlamp High Beam Right
Headlamp High Beam Left
Ignition 1
Fog
Transmission
Cruise Control
Coil Module
Injector Bank #2
Not Used
Not Used
Powertrain Control Module Ignition
Oxygen Sensor
Injector Bank #1
Cigar Lighter #2
Cigar Lighter #1
Daytime Running Lamps
Horn
Air Conditioner Clutch
6-65
Micro Relays
Maxibreaker
Relay
Usage
Circuit Breaker
Usage
27
Headlamp High Beam
41
Starter
28
Headlamp Low Beam
29
Fog Lamps
30
Daytime Running Lamps
31
Horn
32
Air Conditioner Clutch
Mini Relays
Relay
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
6-66
Usage
Not Used
Accessory
Not Used
Starter 1
Cooling Fan Secondary
Ignition 1
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Cooling Fan Primary
MaxiFuses
Fuse
Usage
42
Not Used
43
Anti-Lock Brake System
44
Air Pump B
45
Air Pump A
46
Cooling Fan Secondary
47
Cooling Fan Primary
The spare fuses are located in numbers 48 through 52.
The fuse puller is located in number 53.
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
To Reinstall the Rear Seat Cushion
NOTICE:
The battery and main fuse boxes are located
under the rear seat cushion. The battery’s ground
terminal and some relay wires are exposed. To
help avoid damage to the battery and wires, be
careful when removing or reinstalling the seat
cushion. Do not remove covers from covered
parts. Do not store anything under the seat, as
objects could touch exposed wires and cause
a short.
To Remove the Rear Seat Cushion
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the
front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of
the vehicle.
6-67
CAUTION:
A safety belt that isn’t properly routed through
the seat cushion or is twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. If the safety belt
hasn’t been routed through the seat cushion at
all, it won’t be there to work for the next
passenger. The person sitting in that position
could be badly injured. After reinstalling the seat
cushion, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and are not twisted.
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat
cushion is secured.
Rear Underseat Bussed Electrical Center
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt, then
route the safety belts through the proper slots in the
seat cushion. Don’t let the safety belts get twisted.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into the
wire loops on the back frame.
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and
then press down on the seat cushion until the spring
locks on both ends engage.
6-68
The rear BEC is located under the rear seat on the
driver’s side. The rear seat cushion must be removed to
access the BEC. See “Removing the Rear Seat Cushion”
in the Index.
Fuse
7
Minifuses
Fuse
1
2
3
4
5
6
Usage
Fuel Pump
Heater, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning Battery
Memory Seat, Tilt and
Telescoping Steering
HVAC Blower
Driver Door Module
Heated Seat Left Rear
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Usage
Power Tilt and Telescoping
Steering
Supplemental Inflation Restraint
Not Used
Lamps Park Right
Fuel Tank Ventilation Solenoid
Ignition 1
Interior Lamp Dimmer Module
Sunshade
Navigation
Heated Seat Left Front
Interior Lamps
Right Rear Door Module
Stoplamps
Park/Reverse
Audio
Retained Accessory Power for
Sunroof
Lamps, Parking Left
Night Vision
Passenger Door Module
Body
Export Lights
6-69
Fuse
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Usage
Rear HVAC Blower
Ignition Switch
Hazard Signal
Reverse, Locks
Continuous Variable Road
Sensing Suspension
Heating, Ventilation,
Air Conditioning
Ignition 3 Rear
Antilock Braking System
Heated Seat, Right Front
Heated Seat, Right Rear
Dimmer
Micro Relays
Relay
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
6-70
Usage
Fuel Pump
Parking Lamps
Ignition 1
Park Brake A
Park Brake B
Park Shift Interlock
Reverse Lamps
Relay
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Usage
Retained Accessory Power
for Sunroof
Reverse Lockout
CVRSS Dampers
Ignition 3
Fuel Tank Door Release
Interior Lamps
Trunk Release
Not Used
Lock, Cylinder
Electronic Level
Control Compressor
Circuit Breakers
Relay
56
57
Usage
Power Seats
Power Windows
Mini Relays
Relay
58
59
Usage
Cigar Lighter
Right Rear Defog
MaxiFuses
Capacities and Specifications
Fuse
Usage
60
Park Brake
61
Rear Defog
The following approximate capacities are given in
English and metric conversions. Please refer to
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Maintenance Schedule booklet for more information.
62
Right Rear Lumbar, Power
Engine Specifications
63
Audio Amplifier
64
ELC Compressor/Exhaust
65
Cigar Lighter
66
Not Used
The spare fuses are located in numbers 70 through 74.
The fuse puller is located in number 75.
Replacement Bulbs
Application
Number
Headlamps, Composite
Lower High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Upper Low Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 NA
Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Displacement . . . . . . . . . 279 cubic inches (4 565 cc)
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 L DOHC V8
VIN Engine Code
DeVille and DHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Horsepower
DeVille and DHS . . . . . . . . 275 (bhp) @ 5600 rpm
205 (kW) @ 5600 rpm
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 (bhp) @ 6000 rpm
224 (kW) @ 6000 rpm
Torque
DeVille and DHS . . . . . . . 300 (lb-ft) @ 4000 rpm
407 (N·m) @ 4000 rpm
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 (lb-ft) @ 4400 rpm
400 (N·m) @ 4400 rpm
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-7-3-4-5-6-8
Thermostat Starts To Open . . 177-184_F (81-85_C)
6-71
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb-ft (140 N·m)
Capacities
Transaxle (4T80-E) . . . . . . . . . . 15.0 quarts (14.2 L)
Crankcase (Engine Oil
with Filter Change) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 quarts (7.1 L)
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . 10.68 quarts (10.1 L)
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5 gallons (70.1 L)
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . See refrigerant
charge label under the hood.
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be
sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in
this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
6-72
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Air Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type A 1208C
Fuel Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type GF-627
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type PF-58
PCV Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type CV-774C
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41-950
Gap: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.050 inches (1.3 mm)
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 131-66
Windshield Wiper Blade
(Shepard’s Hook Type) . . . . . . . 22 inches (56.5 cm)
Vehicle Dimensions
Wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113.8 inches (289.1 cm)
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209.78 inches (532.6 cm)
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.4 inches (143.2 cm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76.5 inches (194.3 cm)
Front Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.9 inches (154.6 cm)
Rear Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.9 inches (154.6 cm)
Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Cadillac if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service
publications and how to report any safety defects.
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-7
7-8
7-8
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Roadside Service
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Courtesy Transportation
Transportation Options
7-10
7-10
7-11
7-11
7-11
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
7-
7-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours a day, by
calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the
following steps should be taken:
7-2
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have
a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you
continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to
settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the
interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of
the program is free of charge and your case will generally
be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed
with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
7-3
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to
Cadillac, the letter should be addressed to Cadillac’s
Customer Assistance Center.
United States
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 436004
Pontiac, MI 48343-6004
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
7-4
All Overseas Locations
GMODC - Customer Communication Centre
169-007
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 905-644-4112
Fax:
905-644-4866
Caribbean Numbers
1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico
1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic
1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic
1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-389-0009 Bahamas
1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.
If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean,
call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Roadside Service
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver or
passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. When
calling from outside Canada, please dial 1-905-644-3063.
All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and, when appropriate, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.
7-5
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Servicer can be reached by dialing
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This service is provided at no charge for any
warranty-covered situation and for a nominal charge
if the Cadillac is no longer under warranty. Roadside
Service is available only in the United States
and Canada.
Cadillac Owner Privilegest
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac
Owner Privilegest at “no charge,” throughout
your 2000 Cadillac Warranty Period -- 48 months/
50,000 miles (80 000 km).
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
D
D
D
D
D
7-6
Towing Service
Battery Jump Starting
Lock Out Assistance
Fuel Delivery
Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
D Trip Interruption -- If your trip is interrupted due
to a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be
reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered are
hotel, meals and rental car.
Roadside Service Availability
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada,
an advisor is available to assist you over the phone.
A dealer technician, if available, can travel to your
location within a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a
participating Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius,
we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest
Cadillac dealership.
Reaching Roadside Service
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882-1112. An experienced Roadside
Service Advisor will assist you and request the
following information:
D A description of the problem
D Name, home address, home telephone number
D Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
D The model year, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), mileage and date of delivery
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who have
hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillac has
installed special telecommunication devices called Text
Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada
1-800-833-CMCC -- daily, 24 hours.
7-7
Courtesy Transportation
Cadillac has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to
offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper
to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Several transportation options are available
when warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your
vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for
service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related.
If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
7-8
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Cadillac helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to
get you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a
destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
When your vehicle is unavailable due to warranty repairs,
your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you
obtained, at actual cost, up to a maximum of $35.00 per
day supported by receipts. This requires that you sign and
complete a rental agreement and meet state, local and
rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary
and may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty
coverage information.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.
7-9
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at
its sole discretion.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
7-10
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE CANADIAN
GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service
literature are available for purchase for all current and
past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 436004
Pontiac, MI 48343-6004
7-11
2000 CADILLAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2000 CADILLAC
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
2000 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
7-12
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about
the vehicle.
Owner’s Manual.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)
ORDER TOLL FREE
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
2
0
0
0
PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER
ITEM DESCRIPTION
VEHICLE MODEL
NAME
YEAR
QTY.
PRICE
EACH*
Service Manual
2000
$120.00
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
2000
$50.00
Owner’s Manual
2000
$15.00
TOTAL
PRICE
G
M
S
H
I
P
T
O
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMER’S NAME)
(ATTENTION)
(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
(STATE)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
(ZIP CODE)
(
)
AREA CODE
GM-CAD-ORD99
*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only — do not send cash.)
TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers
add 6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing
MasterCard
VISA
$6.00
Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)
GRAND TOTAL
Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:
Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus the
U.S. order processing.
7-13
✍
7-14
NOTES
Download PDF

advertising